Skip to main content

Full text of "Journal of the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers"

See other formats


JOURNAL  OF  THE  SOCIETY  OF 

MOTION  PICTURE 
AND  TELEVISION 

ENGINEERS 


SUBJECT   HEADINGS 

SUBJECTS 

AUTHORS 

AMERICAN   STANDARDS 


THIS  ISSUE   IN  TWO   PARTS: 
PART  I,  MAY   1951    JOURNAL 
PART  II,   FIVE-YEAR   INDEX 


SOCIETY  OF 
MOTION  PICTURE  AND  TELEVISION  ENGINEERS 


The  Society  is  a  membership  organization  of  motion  picture  and  television  engi- 
neers, technicians,  architects  and  exhibitors,  founded  in  1916  as  the  Society 
of  Motion  Picture  Engineers. 

Members  who  serve  on  technical  committees  combine  their  efforts  toward  im- 
provement, along  technical  lines,  of  film  production  and  exhibition,  television, 
and  film  and  equipment  manufacture,  by  providing  timely  recommendations  and 
guides  to  future  progress.  These  reports,  standards  or  specifications  are  avail- 
able to  all  and  provide  for  orderly  development  of  industry  practices. 

The  Journal  of  the  Society,  beginning  as  Transactions,  has  been  published  since 
1916,  as  an  engineering  history  and  over  the  years  has  become  a  standard 
technical  reference  for  motion  picture  and  television  engineers  everywhere. 

The  Society  has  been  and  plans  to  continue  as  a  vital  factor  in  developing  and 
documenting  the  technical  history  of  the  American  motion  picture  industry,  of 
television,  and  of  all  forms  of  pictorial  rendition  of  action. 

Three  grades  of  membership  are  open  to  qualified  applicants: 


From  the  collection  of  the 
z~£ 

TD    V    m 

3  Jrreiinger 
v    JUibrary 


t 


San  Francisco,  California 
2007 


t  or  other  formal  training  is  a  pre- 
aurna/  and  become  acquainted  with 
leading  authorities. 

and  are  invited  to  participate  in 
Although  not  privileged  to  vote 
committees.    A  serious  interest  in 
Is  is  the  prime  requisite. 

the  Journalf  are  privileged  to  vote, 

len.  They  are,  in  general,  engineers, 

?e  years1  professional  experience  in 


to  which  members  may  be  nominated 
technical  contributions  or  services  to 
1  television. 

individuals,  organizations  or  corpora- 
tion pictures  or  television  and  who 
upport  of  the  Society. 


JOURNAL    OF    THE     SOCIETY    OF 

MOTION  PICTURE 
AND  TELEVISION 

ENGINEERS 


INDEX-: 


946 
195O 


CONTENTS 

INTRODUCTION PAGE  3 

SUBJECT  HEADINGS 5-7 

SUBJECTS 9-50 

AUTHORS 51-70 

AMERICAN  STANDARDS  —  by  subjects   .    .    .  71-72 

by  numbers   .    .    .  73-79 


SOCIETY  OF  MOTION  PICTURE 
AND  TELEVISION  ENGINEERS 

40  West  40th  St..  New  York  18 


Copyright,  1951,  by 

Society  of  Motion  Picture  and 
Television  Engineers 


Printed  in  U.S.A.  by 
MACK  PRINTING  Co.,  E ASTON,  PA. 


Introduction 


THIS  INDEX  is  the  fourth  issued  since  the  Society  was  founded  and 
began  regular  publication  of  a  technical  periodical  in  1916.  The  earlier 
indexes  covered  periods  ending  with  1930,  1935  and  1945. 

All  entries  have  been  chosen  to  provide  a  minimum  of  duplications 
under  different  but  related  subject  headings.  This  keeps  the  Index  to  a 
minimum  practical  size  for  the  easiest  possible  use.  As  a  further  aid  to 
locating  a  specific  item  in  the  Subject  section,  all  subject  headings  have 
been  grouped  in  a  single  list  given  on  pp.  5-7  so  the  reader  can  scan 
them  quickly. 

Items  within  each  subject  group  are  arranged  with  the  most  recent 
article  cited  first.  Committee  reports,  besides  appearing  under  the  appro- 
priate subject,  are  also  listed  under  SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES  —  Commit- 
tees, Reports.  Standards  will  also  be  found  under  the  particular  subject 
heading  and  in  addition  are  listed  in  two  special  indexes:  one  arranged 
alphabetically  by  subject  begins  on  p.  71;  and  the  other  arranged  by 
serial  number  begins  on  p.  73. 

From  1946  through  1950  there  were  several  supplemental  publica- 
tions that  should  be  noted:  single  volume  indexes  were  provided  as  a 
separate  Part  II  of  the  June  and  December  JOURNALS  in  1948,  1949  and 
1950.  During  1946  and  1947,  they  were  printed  as  attached  pages  of 
each  January  and  June  issue. 

Membership  Directories  were  issued  in  1946,  dated  June  30,  with 
supplemental  listings  in  the  JOURNAL  for  June  1947;  in  1948  as  Part  II 
of  the  September  JOURNAL  and  in  1950  as  Part  II  of  the  May  JOURNAL. 

A  group  of  papers  on  high-speed  photography  was  published  as  a 
separate  paper-bound  supplement  (Part  II)  of  the  JOURNAL  for  March 

1949,  and  then  reprinted  as  the  first  volume  of  a  series  on  the  subject. 
The  entire  November  1949  JOURNAL  was  devoted  to  a  second  group  of 
such  papers  and  in  reprint  form  became  High  Speed  Photography  Vol.  2. 
Volume  3  of  the  series  was  issued  in  May  1951  as  a  composite  reprint  of 
all  high-speed  photography  papers  published  in  the  JOURNAL  during 

1950.  This  Index  provides  references  only  for  the  original  appearance  in 
the  JOURNAL  of  each  particular  paper.    Volume  3  contains  a  cumulative 
index  to  all  three  volumes,  plus  an  extensive  17-page  bibliography  on  the 
subject  which  appeared  first  in  the  January  1951  JOURNAL. 

A  list  of  all  available  Society  publications  will  be  sent  to  anyone  who 
requests  it  of  Society  headquarters. 


Subject  Headings 


ACOUSTICS 

AIR-CONDITIONING 

AMERICAN  STANDARDS  ASSOCIATION  (see  also  STANDARDS,  pp.  71  and  73, 

and  SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES— Committees,  Reports) 
Architecture:  see  STUDIOS,  and  THEATER 
ARCS 

General 

Projection 

Studio  Lighting 

Awards  and  Citations:  see  SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES 
Background  Projection:  see  PROJECTION— Background 
BIOGRAPHIES 
BOOK  REVIEWS 

CAMERAS  (see  also  HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY) 
CINEMATOGRAPHY  (see  also  HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY) 
COLOR 
Committee  Activities  and  Reports:  see  specific  subject  and  also  SOCIETY 

ACTIVITIES— Committees,  Reports 
CURRENT  LITERATURE 
Densitometry:  see  SENSITOMETRY 
Developing:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE 
DISTRIBUTION— Foreign 
Drive  Systems:  see  MOTOR-DRIVE  SYSTEMS 
Dubbing:  see  SOUND  RECORDING 
Edge-Numbering:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE 
EDITING  (see  also  LABORATORY  PRACTICE) 
EDUCATION 

Exchange  Practice:   see  DISTRIBUTION 
Exposure  Meters:  see  PHOTOMETRY 
Federal  Communications  Commission:  see  TELEVISION 
Fellow  Awards:  see  SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES 

FILM 

General 

Educational,  Documentary  and  Training 

Libraries 

Preservation  and  Storage 

Test 

Wear 

GENERAL 

HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY  (see  also  OSCILLOGRAPHY ) 

General 
Applications 
Cameras 
Lighting 


Subject  Headings,  cont'd 

HISTORICAL 

Intermittent  Sprockets:  see  SPROCKETS 

Journal  Award:  see  SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES 

LABORATORY  PRACTICE  (see  also  EDITING) 
General 
Printing 
Processing 

Lenses:  see  OPTICS 

LIGHTING    (see  also  ARCS,  HIGH-SPEED   PHOTOGRAPHY,   PHOTOMETRY, 
and  SCREEN  BRIGHTNESS) 

General 

Projection 

Studio 

Loudspeakers:  see  SOUND  REPRODUCTION 

Microphones:  see  SOUND  RECORDING 

Motion  Picture  Photography:  see  CINEMATOGRAPHY 

MOTOR-DRIVE  SYSTEMS 

MUSIC  (see  also  ACOUSTICS,  and  SOUND  RECORDING) 

NEW  PRODUCTS 

NEWSREELS  (see  also  PRODUCTION) 

OBITUARIES 

Optical  Printing:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE 

OPTICS 

OSCILLOGRAPHY  (see  also  HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY) 

Photography:  see  CINEMATOGRAPHY,  and  HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY 

PHOTOMETRY  (see  also  LIGHTING,  OPTICS,  and  SCREEN  BRIGHTNESS) 

PHOTOTEMPLATES 

PHOTOTUBES  (see  also  SOUND  REPRODUCTION) 

Polarization:  see  STEREOSCOPY 

Post-Synchronization:  see  PRODUCTION,  and  SOUND  RECORDING 

Printing:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE,  and  SPECIAL  EFFECTS 

Process  Photography:  see  PROJECTION— Background,  and  SPECIAL  EFFECTS 

Processing:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE 

PRODUCTION 

PROGRESS  COMMITTEE  REPORTS 

Progress  Medal  Award:  see  SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES 

PROJECTION 

Background  (see  also  SPECIAL  EFFECTS) 

16-Mm  and  8-Mm 

35-Mm  (see  also  LIGHTING— Projection ) 

PULL-DOWN  MECHANISMS 

Re-recording:  see  SOUND  RECORDING 

RESEARCH  COUNCIL 

Scoring:  see  SOUND  RECORDING 

SCREEN  BRIGHTNESS  (see  also  ARCS,  and  LIGHTING) 

SCREENS 

•     6     • 


Subject  Headings,  cont'd 

SENSITOMETRY 
SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES 

General 

Awards  and  Citations 

Board  Meetings 

Committees 

Constitution  and  Bylaws 

Conventions 

Engineering  Activities  (News  and  Brief  Reports) 

Financial  Reports 

Letters  to  the  Editor 

Membership  and  Subscriptions 

Nominations 

Officers  and  Governors  of  the  Society 

Officers'  Reports 

Section  Activities 
SOUND  RECORDING 

General 

Magnetic 

Photographic 

Re-recording 
SOUND  REPRODUCTION 

General 

Loudspeakers 

Theater 

SPECIAL  EFFECTS  (see  also  PROJECTION— Background) 
Splicing:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE 
SPROCKETS  (see  also  FILM— General) 

Standards:  see  the  two  indexes  on  pp.  71  and  73  or  the  specific  subject  heading 
STEREOSCOPY 
STUDIOS  (see  also  PRODUCTION) 

TELEVISION  (see  also  LIGHTING— Sfudto,  and  THEATER  TELEVISION) 

General 

Color 

Film  Recording 

Films 

Lighting 

Picture  Quality 

Screens 

Studio  Production 
Test  Film:  see  FILM— Test 
THEATER 

General 

Architecture  and  Design  (see  also  ACOUSTICS) 

Lighting 

Maintenance  and  Operation 
THEATER  TELEVISION 
Training  Film:  see  FILM — Educational,  Documentary  and  Training 


Subject  Index 


ACOUSTICS. 


Behavior  of  Acoustic  Materials,  Richard 
K.  Cook,  51:  192-202,  Aug.  1948. 

Quieting  and  Noise  Isolation,  E.  J.  Con- 
tent, 51:  184-191,  Aug.  1948. 

Auditorium  Acoustics,  J.  P.  Maxfield,  51: 
169-183,  Aug.  1948. 

Acoustical  Factors  in  the  Design  of  Mo- 
tion Picture  Equipment,  Howard  C. 
Hardy,  50:  139-148,  Feb.  1948. 

Space  Acoustics,  James  Y.  Dunbar,  49: 
372-388,  Oct.  1947. 

Sound    Absorption    and    Impedance    of 


Acoustical  Materials,  Hale  J.  Sabine, 
49:  262-278,  Sept.  1947. 

Combination  Scoring,  Re-recording,  and 
Preview  Studio,  Daniel  J.  Bloomberg, 
W.  O.  Watson,  and  Michael  Rettinger, 
49:  3-26,  July  1947. 

Dubbing  and  Post-Synchronization  Stu- 
dios, William  A.  Mueller,  47:  230-237, 
Sept.  1946. 

A  Discussion  of  the  Acoustical  Properties 
of  Fiberglas,  Willis  M.  Rees  and 
Robert  B.  Taylor,  46:  52-63,  Jan. 
1946. 


AIR-CONDITIONING 

Discussion  on  Ventilating  and  Air  Con- 
ditioning, 51:  94-100,  July  1948. 

Service  and  Maintenance  of  Air-Con- 
ditioning  Systems,  W.  B.  Cott,  51:  92- 
93,  July  1948. 

Ultraviolet  Air  Disinfection  in  the 
Theater,  L.  J.  Buttolph,  51:  79-91, 
July  1948. 


Air  Purification  by  Glycol  Vapor,  J.  W. 
Spiselman,  51:  70-78,  July  1948. 

Motion  Picture  Theater  Air  Condition- 
ing, Dwight  D.  Kimball,  51:  52-69, 
July  1948. 

The  Measurement  and  Control  of  Dirt  in 
Motion  Picture  Processing  Laboratories, 
N.  L.  Simmons  and  A.  C.  Robertson, 
46:  185-205,  Mar.  1946. 


AMERICAN  STANDARDS  ASSOCIATION  (see  also  STANDARDS,  pp.  71  and  73, 
and  SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES— Committees,  Reports) 


ASA  Correlating  Committee,  54:  239, 
Feb.  1950. 

ASA  Standards  Z10  (Listed),  52:  338, 
Mar.  1949. 

ASA  Adopts  Universal  Decimal  Classifica- 
tion System,  51:  552,  Nov.  1948. 

Incorporation  of  American  Standards  As- 
sociation, 51:  440,  Oct.  1948. 

ASA  Appoints   Vice-Admiral  Hussey  as 


Administrative    Head,    50:    182,   Feb. 

1948. 

New  Letter  Symbols  for  Chemical  Engi- 
neering, 48:  272-273,  Mar.  1947. 
International  Motion  Picture   Standards, 

Donald    E.    Hyndman,    48:    126-128, 

Feb.  1947. 
Standardization  and  the  Antitrust  Laws, 

James  D.   Hayes,  46:    516-525,  June 

1946. 


Architecture:  see  STUDIOS,  and  THEATER 

•     9     • 


ARCS 

General 

Effect  of  Carbon  Cooling  on  High-Current 
Arcs,  Wolfgang  Finkelnburg,  52:  407- 
416,  Apr.  1949. 

Optimum  Performance  of  High-Bright- 
ness Carbon  Arcs,  M.  T.  Jones  and 
F.  T.  Bowditch,  52:  395-406,  Apr. 
1949. 

Light  Generation  by  the  High-Intensity 
Carbon  Arc,  F.  T.  Bowditch,  49:  209- 
217,  Sept.  1947. 

The  Concentrated-Arc  Lamp  as  a  Source 
of  Modulated  Radiation,  W.  D.  Buck- 
ingham and  C.  R.  Deibert,  48:  324- 
342,  Apr.  1947. 

Characteristics  and  Applications  of  Con- 
centrated-Arc Lamps,  W.  D.  Bucking- 
ham and  C.  R.  Deibert,  47:  376-399, 
Nov.  1946. 

Projection 

New  Projection  Lamp  and  Carbon-Feed 
Mechanism,  J.  K.  Elderkin,  54:  87- 
94,  Jan.  1950. 

Color  Measurement  of  Motion  Picture 
Screen  Illumination,  R.  E.  Harrington 
and  F.  T.  Bowditch,  54:  63-73,  Jan. 
1950. 

High-Intensity     Projection     Arc     Lamp, 


Charles  A.  Hahn,  50:  489-501,  May 
1948. 

Motion  Picture  Screen  Light  as  a  Func- 
tion of  Carbon-Arc-Crater  Brightness 
Distribution,  M.  T.  Jones,  49:  218-240, 
Sept.  1947. 

Recent  Developments  of  Super-High-In- 
tensity Carbon- Arc  Lamps,  M.  A. 
Hankins,  49:  37-47,  July  1947. 

Increased  Light  for  Projection  of  16-Mm 
Film  with  Carbon  Arcs,  R.  J.  Zavesky 
and  W.  W.  Lozier,  48:  447-453,  May 
1947. 

Screen  Illumination  with  Carbon  Arc  Mo- 
tion Picture  Projection  Systems,  R.  J. 
Zavesky,  C.  J.  Gertiser,  and  W.  W. 
Lozier,  48:  73-81,  Jan.  1947. 

Studio  Lighting 

New  Developments  in  Mercury  Lamps 
for  Studio  Lighting,  F.  E.  Carlson, 
50:  122-138,  Feb.  1948. 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Studio  Light- 
ing, C.  W.  Handley,  Chairman,  47: 
113-118,  July  1946. 

Carbon  Arcs  for  Motion  Picture  and  Tele- 
vision Studio  Lighting,  F.  T.  Bowditch, 
M.  R.  Null  and  R.  J.  Zavesky,  46:  441- 
453,  June  1946. 


Awards  and  Citations:  see  SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES 
Background  Projection:  see  PROJECTION— Background 


BIOGRAPHIES. 


Gage,  Henry  Phelps,  50:  89,  Jan.  1948. 
Dubray,  Joseph  A.,  50:  88,  Jan.  1948. 
My  First  Fifty  Years  in  Motion  Pictures, 

Oscar  B.   Depue,  49:   481-493,   Dec. 

1947. 
Warner,  Samuel  L.,  48:  443-446,  May 

1947. 
Craft,    Edward   B.,    48:    440-443,    May 

1947. 


Case,  Theodore  W.,  48:  437-i40,  May 

1947. 
Historical  Development  of  Sound  Films, 

E.  I.  Sponable,  48:  407-422,  May  1947. 
Historical  Development  of  Sound  Films, 

E.  I.  Sponable,  48:  275-303,  Apr.  1947. 
Wilbur  B.  Rayton,  by  I.  L.  Nixon,  48: 

217-219,  Mar.  1947. 


10 


BOOK  REVIEWS. 


A  Grammar  of  the  Film,  by  Raymond 
Spottiswoode  (Reviewed  by  Russell 
C.  Holslag),  55:  553,  Nov.  1950. 

Photographic  Optics,  by  Allen  R.  Green- 
leaf  (Reviewed  by  Oscar  W.  Rich- 
ards), 55:  552,  Nov.  1950. 

Photographic  Instantantee  et  Cinematog- 
raphic Ultra-Rapide,  par  P.  Fayolle 
et  P.  Naslin  (Reviewed  by  John  H. 
Waddell),  55:  445,  Oct.  1950. 

Reunions  D'Opticiens,  Tenues  a  Paris 
en  Octobre  1946,  Textes  rassembles 
par  Pierre  Fleury,  Andre  Marechal  et 
Mme.  Claire  Anglade,  Institut  d'Op- 
tique,  Paris  (Reviewed  by  Dr.  K.  Pes- 
trecov),  55:  445,  Oct.  1950. 

Questions  and  Answers  in  Television  En- 
gineering, by  Carter  V.  Rabinoff  and 
Magdalena  E.  Walbrecht  (Reviewed 
by  Richard  H.  Dorf),  55:  444,  OcL 
1950. 

Theatre  Catalog,  8th  Annual  Edition, 
1949-1950,  Jay  Emanuel  Publications, 
Inc.  (Reviewed  by  Leonard  Satz),  55: 
333,  Sept.  1950. 

American  Cinematographer  Hand  Book 
and  Reference  Guide,  Seventh  Edi- 
tion, by  Jackson  J.  Rose  (Reviewed 
by  John  W.  Boyle),  55:  333,  Sept. 
1950. 

Sound  Absorbing  Materials,  by  C.  Zwik- 
ker  and  C.  W.  Kosten  (Reviewed  by 
Hale  J.  Sabine),  55:  332,  Sept.  1950. 

Practical  Television  Engineering,  by  Scott 
Kelt  ( Reviewed  by  E.  Arthur  Hunger- 
ford,  Jr.),  55:  331,  Sept.  1950. 

The  American  Annual  of  Photography, 
Vol.  64,  1950,  edited  by  Frank  R. 
Fraprie  and  Franklin  I.  Jordan  (Re- 
viewed by  John  W.  Boyle),  55:  331, 
Sept.  1950. 

The  Organiation  of  Industrial  Scientific 
Research,  by  C.  E.  Kenneth  Mees  and 
John  A.  Leermakers  (Reviewed  by 
G.  T.  Lorance),  55:  221,  Aug.  1950. 

Film  User  Year  Book,  Vol.  II,  1950, 
edited  by  Bernard  Dolman  (Reviewed 
by  William  K.  Aughenbaugh ) ,  55:  220, 
Aug.  1950. 

Handbook  of  Basic  Motion-Picture  Tech- 
niques, by  Emil  E.  Brodbeck  (Re- 
viewed by  James  W.  Moore),  55: 
126,  July  1950. 


Noise  and  Sound  Transmission,  Report 
of  the  1948  Summer  Symposium  of 
the  Acoustics  Group  (Reviewed  by  V. 
O.  Knudsen),  54:  511,  Apr.  1950. 

Introduction  to  Theoretical  and  Experi- 
mental Optics,  by  Joseph  Valasek  ( Re- 
viewed by  Dr.  K.  Pestrecov),  54:  386, 
Mar.  1950. 

Tlie  Recording  and  Reproduction  of 
Sound,  by  Oliver  Read  (Reviewed  by 
O.  B.  Gunby),  54:  242,  Feb.  1950. 

16-Mm  Sound  Motion  Pictures,  by  W. 
H.  Offenhauser,  Jr.  (Reviewed  by 
L.  T.  Goldsmith),  54:  241,  Feb.  1950. 

The  Complete  Projectionist,  by  R.  How- 
ard Cricks  ( Reviewed  by  Merle  Cham- 
berlin),  54:  119,  Jan.  1950. 

Feininger  on  Photography,  by  Andreas 
Feininger  (Reviewed  by  L.  E.  Var- 
den),  54:  118,  Jan.  1950. 

Painting  with  Light,  by  John  Alton  (Re- 
viewed by  J.  W.  Boyle),  54:  118,  Jan. 
1950. 

Acoustic  Measurements,  by  Leo  L.  Ber- 
anek  (Reviewed  by  Harvey  Fletcher), 
54:  117,  Jan.  1950. 

The  Information  Film,  by  Gloria  Waldron 
(Reviewed  by  Charles  F.  Hoban,  Jr.), 
53:  709-710,  Dec.  1949. 

Photoelectricity  and  Its  Application,  by 
V.  K.  Zworykin  and  E.  G.  Ramberg 
(Reviewed  by  A.  N.  Goldsmith),  53: 
708-709,  Dec.  1949. 

Reference  Data  for  Radio  Engineers, 
Third  Edition,  Published  by  the  Fed- 
eral Telephone  and  Radio  Corporation 
(Reviewed  by  H.  J.  Schlafly),  53: 
708,  Dec.  1949. 

Look  and  See,  by  Colin  Beale  (Re- 
viewed by  Paul  R.  Wendt),  53:  605- 
606,  Nov.  1949. 

The  Blue  Book  of  Audio-Visual  Equip- 
ment, 1948,  published  by  Business 
Screen  Magazine  and  The  National  As- 
sociation of  Visual  Education  Dealers 
(Reviewed  by  Paul  R.  Wendt),  53: 
605,  Nov.  1949. 

The  Sound  Track  Book  of  the  Theatre, 
Published  by  The  Sound  Track,  Chi- 
cago, Illinois  (Reviewed  by  W.  K. 
Aughenbaugh),  53:  422-423,  Oct 
1949. 


11 


BOOK  REVIEWS,  confd 

Electron  Tubes  (Vol.  1-1935-1941;  Vol. 
11-1942-1948),  Published  by  RCA  Re- 
view, Princeton,  New  Jersey  ( Reviewed 
by  L.  F.  Brown),  53:  422,  Oct.  1949. 

Magnetic  Recording,  by  S.  J.  Begun  ( Re- 
viewed by  J.  G.  Frayne),  53:  316, 
Sept.  1949. 

Elements  of  Sound  Recording,  by  J.  G 
Frayne  and  Halley  Wolfe  (Reviewed 
by  L.  T.  Goldsmith),  53:  315,  Sept. 
1949. 

Better  Color  Movies,  by  Fred  Bond  ( Re- 
viewed by  Lloyd  Thompson),  53:  104- 
105,  July  1949. 

Physical  Aspects  of  Colour,  by  P.  J. 
Bouma  (Reviewed  by  R.  M.  Evans), 
53:  103-104,  July  1949. 

Comparative  List  of  Color  Terms,  Pub- 
lished by  the  Inter-Society  Color  Coun- 
cil (Reviewed  by  J.  L.  Forrest),  53: 
103,  July  1949. 

Hochstromkohlebogen,  by  Wolfgang 
Finkelnburg,  52:  702,  June  1949. 

Friese-Greene:  Close-up  of  an  Inventor, 
by  Ray  Allister  (Reviewed  by  Terry 
Ramsaye),  52:  49&-497,  Apr.  1949. 

Discharge  Lamps,  by  H.  K.  Bourne  (Re- 
viewed by  F.  E.  Carlson),  52:  357- 
358,  Mar.  1949. 

Sound  and  Documentary  Film,  by  K. 
Cameron  (Foreward  by  Cavalcanti) 
(Reviewed  by  Glenn  E.  Matthews), 
52:  357,  Mar.  1949. 

An  Introduction  to  Color,  by  Ralph  M. 
Evans  (Reviewed  by  Herbert  T.  Kal- 
mus),  52:  236-237,  Feb.  1949. 

High-Current  Carbon  Arc,  by  Wolfgang 
Finkelnburg  (Reviewed  by  F.  T.  Bow- 
ditch),  52:  112-113,  Jan.  1949. 

Informational  Film  Year  Book,  1948,  pub- 
lished by  Albyn  Press,  Edinburgh, 
Scotland,  (Reviewed  by  Lloyd  E. 
Varden),  52:  112,  Jan.  1949. 

VAnnuaire  du  Cinema  1948  (Motion 
Picture  Yearbook  for  1948),  Published 
by  Editions  Bellefaye,  Paris,  France, 
51:  551,  Nov.  1948. 

Diary  and  Sundry  Observations  of 
Thomas  Alva  Edison,  Edited  by  Dago- 
bert  D.  Runes  (Reviewed  by  Terry 
Ramsaye),  51:  550-551,  Nov.  1948. 

Informational  Film  Year  Book  1947,  pub- 


lished by  Albyn  Press,  Edinburgh, 
Scotland,  (Reviewed  by  Glenn  E. 
Matthews),  51:  444,  Oct  1948. 

Camera  and  Lens,  by  Ansel  Adams  (Re- 
viewed by  Llovd  E.  Varden),  51:  443- 
444,  Oct.  1948. 

Enlarging— Technique  of  the  Positive, 
by  C.  I.  Jacobson  ( Reviewed  by  Joseph 
S.  Friedman),  51:  443,  Oct.  1948. 

Preparation  and  Use  of  Visual  Aids,  by 
Kenneth  B.  Haas  and  Harry  G.  Packer 
(Reviewed  by  W.  A.  Wittich),  51: 
330,  Sept.  1948. 

Photographic  Facts  and  Formulas,  by  E. 
J.  Wall  and  Franklin  I.  Jordan  (Re- 
viewed by  Howard  A.  Miller),  51: 
214-215,  Aug.  1948. 

Magic  Shadows,  by  Martin  Quigley,  Jr. 
(Reviewed  by  John  E.  Abbott),  51: 
214,  Aug.  1948. 

Developing— Technique  of  the  Negative, 
by  C.  I.  Jacobson  ( Reviewed  by  Joseph 
S.  Friedman),  51:  105,  July  1948. 

Elements  of  Acoustical  Engineering,  by 
H.  F.  Olson  (Reviewed  by  Vincent 
Salmon),  50:  615-616,  June  1948. 

Patent  Notes  for  Engineers,  by  C.  D. 
Tuska  (Reviewed  by  I.  R.  Goshaw), 
50:  520-521,  May  1948. 

Applied  Architectural  Acoustics,  by  Mi- 
chael Rettinger  (Reviewed  by  C.  S. 
Perkins),  50:  520,  May  1948. 

Television-Volume  III  (1938-1941) 
Television-Volume  IV  (1942-1946). 
Published  by  RCA  Review  (Reviewed 
by  Pierre  Mertz),  50:  299-300,  Mar. 
1948. 

Architects  Manual  of  Engineered  Sound 
Systems,  published  by  the  Radio  Cor- 
poration of  America  (Reviewed  by  C. 
S.  Perkins),  50:  299,  Mar.  1948. 

Report  of  Conference  on  Unification  of 
Engineering  Standards,  Ottawa  Can- 
ada (Reviewed  by  M.  Wright)  46: 
425,  May  1946. 

Television  Show  Business,  Judy  Dupuy 
(Reviewed  by  D.  R.  White)  46:  424- 
425,  May,  1946. 

Television:  The  Eyes  of  Tomorrow,  W. 
C.  Eddy  (Reviewed  by  D.  R.  White), 
46:  424,  May  1946. 


CAMERAS  (see  also  HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY). 

A  Reflex  35-Mm  Magazine  Motion  Pic- 
ture Camera,  A.  Coutant  and  J.  Mathot, 
55: '173-179,  Aug.  1950. 

American  Standard  Location  and  Size 
of  Picture  Aperture  of  8-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Cameras,  Z22. 19-1950  (Re- 
vision of  Z22.19-1941),  54:  501-502, 
Apr.  1950. 

American  Standard  Location  and  Size 
of  Picture  Aperture  of  16-Mm  Motion 
Ricture  Cameras,  Z22.7-1950  (Re- 
vision of  Z22.7-1941  and  Z22.13- 
1941),  54:  495-497,  Apr.  1950. 

Proposed  American  Standard  Base  Point 
for  Focusing  Scales  on  16-Mm  and 
8-Mm  Motion  Picture  Cameras, 
Z22.74,  53:  297,  Sept.  1949. 

Television  Recording  Camera,  J.  L.  Boon, 


W.  Feldman,  and  J.  Stoiber,  51:  117- 
126,  Aug.  1948. 

New  Three-Color  Camera,  Jack  H.  Coote, 
50:  543-553,  June  1948. 

American  Standard  Photographing  Aper- 
ture of  35-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture 
Cameras,  Z22.59-1947,  50:  287,  Mar. 
1948. 

A  Stabilization  System  by  Rate  Measure- 
ment, Avery  Lockner,  49:  88-92,  July 
1947. 

A  New  16-Mm  Professional  Camera, 
Friend  F.  Baker,  48:  157-162,  Feb. 
1947. 

Specialized  Photography  Applied  to  Engi- 
neering in  the  Army  Air  Forces,  P.  M. 
Thomas  and  C.  H.  Coles,  46:  220-230, 
Mar.  1946. 

Technical  News,  46:  80-84,  Jan.  1948 


CINEMATOGRAPHY  (see  also  HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY). 

U.S.  Naval  Underwater  Cinematography 

Techniques,  R.  R.  Conger,  55:   627- 

634,  Dec.  1950. 

The  Cine  Flash,  A  New  Lighting  Equip- 
ment for  High-Speed  Cinephotography 

and  Studio  Effects,  H.  K.  Bourne  and 

E.  J.  G.  Beeson,  55:   299-312,  Sept. 

1950. 
Effects  of  Incorrect  Color  Temperature 

on  Motion  Picture  Production,  F.   F. 

Crandell,  K.  Freund  and  L.  Moen,  55: 

67-87,  July  1950. 
Motion    Picture    Color    Photography    of 

Color  Television  Images,  W.  R.  Fraser, 

and  G.  J.  Badgley,  54:  735-744,  June 

1950. 
Light  Measurement  for  Exposure  Control, 

Don  Norwood,  54:  585-602,  May  1950. 
Color    Temperature:    Its    Use    in    Color 

Photography,  O.  E.  Miller,  54:  435- 

444,  Apr.  1950. 
A  Motion  Repeating  System  for  Special 

Effect  Photography,  O.  L.  Dupy,  54: 

290-294,    Mar.    1950. 
Sensitometric    Aspects     of     Background 

Process  Photography,   Herbert  Meyer, 

54:   275-289,   Mar.   1950. 
Color  Cinematography  in  the  Mines,  M. 

C.  Linko,  54:  199-208,  Feb.  1950. 


Cathode-Ray-Tube  Applications  in  Pho- 
tography and  Optics,  Carl  Berkley  and 
Rudolf  Feldt,  53:  64-85,  July  1949. 

1000-Foot  Bipack  Magazine  and  Adapter, 
W.  R.  Holm  and  J.  W.  Kaylor,  53: 
58-63,  July  1949. 

Research  Council  Small  Camera  Crane, 
Andre  Grot,  52:  273-279,  Mar.  1949. 

Three-Color  Subtractive  Photography,  W. 
T.  Hanson,  Jr.,  and  F.  A.  Richey, 
52:  119-132,  Feb.  1949. 

Navy  Photography  in  the  Antarctic,  C. 
C.  Shirley,  52:  19-29,  Jan.  1949. 

Zoomar  Lens  for  35-Mm  Film,  F.  G. 
Back,  51:  294-297,  Sept.  1948. 

The  Mult-Efex  Titler  Device,  James  T. 
Strohm,  49:  544-546,  Dec.  1947. 

A  Survey  of  the  Application  of  Photog- 
raphy in  Naval  Research,  Testing  and 
Development,  J.  H.  Bell  and  W.  R. 
Cronenwett,  49:  494-505,  Dec.  1947. 

A  New  Sunshade  and  Filter  Holder  for 
16-  and  8-Mm  Motion  Picture  Cameras, 
James  T.  Strohm,  49:  468-470,  Nov. 
1947. 

Kodachrome  Motion  Pictures  of  the 
Human  Air  and  Food  Passages,  Paul 
H.  Holinger,  M.D.,  and  J.  D.  Bru- 
baker,  49:  248-261,  Sept.  1947. 


13 


CINEMATOGRAPHY,  confd 

Adaptations  and  Applications  of  16-Mm 
Motion  Picture  Equipment  to  Medical 
and  Scientific  Needs,  Mervin  W.  La 
Rue,  Sr.,  and  Mervin  W.  La  Rue,  Jr., 
49:  241-247,  Sept.  1947. 

Remote  Control  and  Automatic  Focusing 
of  Lenses,  H.  C.  Silent,  49:  130-139, 
Aug.  1947. 

A  Stabilization  System  by  Rate  Measure- 
ment, Avery  Lockner,  49:  88-92,  July 
1947. 

The  Physical  Properties  and  the  Practi- 
cal Application  of  the  Zoomar  Lens, 
Frank  G.  Back,  49:  57-63,  July  1947. 

Motion  Pictures  on  Operation  Crossroads, 
Richard  J.  Cunningham,  48:  554-559, 
June  1947. 

Lighting  and  Exposure  Control  in  Color 
Cinematography,  Ralph  A.  Woodsey, 
48:  548-553,  June  1947. 

Radar  Scope  Photography,  Richard  C. 
Babish,  48:  454-472,  May  1947. 

Report  of  the  SMPE  Committee  on  Prog- 
ress, W.  V.  Wolfe,  Chairman,  48:  304- 
316,  Apr.  1947. 


A  New  Series  of  Camera  Lenses  for  16- 
Mm  Cinematography,  W.  B.  Rayton, 
48:  211-216,  Mar.  1947. 

Zoom  Lens  for  Motion  Picture  Cameras 
with  Single-Barrel  Linear  Movement, 
Frank  G.  Back,  47:  464-468,  Dec. 
1946. 

The  Newsreel-Its  Production  and  Signifi- 
cance: The  Newsreel  Cameraman, 
Walter  Mclnnis,  47:  368-371,  Nov. 
1946. 

Modernization  Desires  of  a  Major  Studio, 
Loren  L.  Ryder,  47:  225-229,  Sept 
1946. 

The  Use  of  Dessicants  with  Undeveloped 
Photographic  Film,  C.  J.  Kunz  and 
C.  E.  Ives,  46:  475-510,  June  1946. 

The  Theory  and  Practice  of  Lighting  for 
the  Camera,  Howard  T.  Souther,  46: 
254-271,  Apr.  1946. 

The  Illusion  of  Depth  in  Motion  Pictures, 
Howard  T.  Souther,  46:  245-253,  Apr. 
1946. 


COLOR. 


New  Laboratory  for  Processing  Mono- 
pack  Color  Film,  K.  Gopal,  55:  639- 
646,  Dec.  1950. 

35-Mm  Ansco  Color  Theater  Prints  from 
16-Mm  Kodachrome,  A.  Mosser  and 
L.  Dunn,  55:  635-638,  Dec.  1950. 

Synthetic  Color-Forming  Binders  for 
Photographic  Emulsions,  A.  B.  Jen- 
nings, W.  A.  Stanton  and  J.  P.  Weiss, 
55;  455-476,  Nov.  1950. 

Color  Cathode-Ray  Tube  With  Three 
Phosphor  Bands,  C.  S.  Szegho,  55: 
367-376,  Oct.  1950. 

Color  Television,  F.  H.  Mclntosh  and  A. 
F.  Inglis,  55:  343-366,  Oct.  1950. 

Color  Committee  Report,  H.  H.  Duerr, 
Chairman,  55:  113-116,  July  1950. 

Effects  of  Incorrect  Color  Temperature 
on  Motion  Picture  Production,  F.  F. 
Crandell,  K.  Freund  and  L.  Moen,  55: 
67-87,  July  1950. 

Motion  Picture  Color  Photography  of 
Color  Television  Images,  W.  R.  Fraser 
and  G.  J.  Badgley,  54:  735-744,  June 
1950. 


Principals  of  Color  Sensitometry  (Report 
of  Color  Sensitometry  Subcommittee), 
Herman  H.  Duerr,  Chairman,  54:  65&- 
724,  June  1950. 

16-Mm  Film  Color  Compensation,  O.  K. 
Kendall,  54:  464-479,  Apr.  1950. 

Printing  Equipment  for  Ansco  Color 
Film,  F.  P.  Herrnfeld,  54:  454-463, 
Apr.  1950. 

An  Experimental  35-Mm  Multilayer 
Stripping  Negative  Film,  J.  G.  Cap- 
staff,  54:  445-453,  Apr.  1950. 

Color  Temperature:  Its  Use  in  Color 
Photography,  O.  E.  Miller,  54:  435- 
444,  Apr.  1950. 

Characteristics  of  Color  Film  Sound 
Tracks,  L.  T.  Goldsmith,  Chairman 
(Color  Committee  Report),  54:  377- 
378,  Mar.  1950. 

Color  Cinematography  in  the  Mines,  M. 
C.  Linko,  54:  199-208,  Feb.  1950. 

Cinecolor  Three-Color  Process,  A.  M. 
Gundelfinger,  54:  74-86,  Jan.  1950. 

Color  Measurement  of  Motion  Picture 
Screen  Illumination,  R.  E.  Harrington 


14 


COLOR,  confd 

and  F.  T.  Bowditch,  54:  63-73,  Jan. 

1950. 
An  Improved  Photomultiplier  Tube  Color 

Densitometer,  M.  H.  Sweet,  54:   35- 

62,  Jan.  1950. 
High-Speed  Motion  Pictures  in  Full  Color, 

F.  M.  Tylee,  53:  588-593,  Nov.  1949. 
Use  of  35-Mm  Ansco  Color  Film  for  16- 

Mm  Color  Release  Prints,  R.  H.  Ray, 

53:    140-148,  Aug.   1949. 
1000-Foot  Bipack  Magazine  and  Adapter, 

W.  R.   Holm  and  J.  W.  Kaylor,  53: 

58-63,  July  1949. 
Laboratory   for   Development   Work   on 

Color  Motion   Pictures,   H.   C.   Harsh 

and    K.    Schadlich,    53:    50-57,    July 

1949. 
Metallic-Salt    Track    on    Ansco    16-Mm 

Color  Film,  J.  L.  Forrest,  53:  40-49, 

July  1949. 
Note  on  an  Improved  Filter  Holder  for 

Color  Printing,  T.  J.  Braun,  53:  36-39, 

July  1949. 
Analysis  of  Developers   and  Bleach  for 

Ansco  Color  Film,  A.  H.  Brunner,  Jr., 

P.  B.  Means,  Jr.,  and  R.  H.  Zappert, 

53:   25-35,  July  1949. 
Processing  Control  Procedures  for  Ansco 

Color   Film,   J.    E.    Bates    and   I.    V. 

Runyan,  53:  3-24,  July  1949. 
System  in  Color  Preferences,  J.  P.  Guil- 

ford,  52:   197-210,  Feb.  1949. 
Color-Order   Systems,   C.    E.   Foss,   52: 

184-196,  Feb.  1949. 
Spectral  Characteristics  of  Light  Sources, 

Norman  Macbeth  and  Dorothy  Nicker- 

son,  52:  157-183,  Feb.  1949. 
Inter-Society  Color  Council  Symposium— 

Foreward,  C.  R.  Keith,  52:  156,  Feb. 

1949. 
Masking:  A  Technique  for  Improving  the 

Quality    of    Color    Reproductions,    T. 

H.  Miller,  52:  133-155,  Feb.  1949. 
Three-Color  Subtractive  Photography,  W. 

T.  Hanson,  Jr.,  and  F.  A.  Richey,  52: 

119-132,  Feb.  1949. 
Colorimetry   in   Television,    William    H. 

Cherry,  51:  613-642,  Dec.  1948. 
Color-Television  Film  Scanner,  Bernard 

Erde,  51:  351-372,  Oct.  1948. 
New  Three-Color  Camera,  Jack  H.  Coote, 

50:  543-553,  June  1948. 


Inter-Society  Color  Council,  50:  183-185, 

Feb.  1948. 
New    One-Strip    Color-Separation    Film 

in  Motion  Picture  Production,  H.   C. 

Harsh  and  J.  S.  Friedman,  50:  8-13, 

Jan.  1948. 
A  Photoelectric  Method  for  Determining 

Color  Balance  of  16-Mm  Kodachrome 

Duplicating  Printers,  Paul  S.  Aex,  49: 

425-430,  Nov.  1947. 
Lead-Sulfide   Photoconductive    Cells   for 

Sound  Reproduction,  R.  J.   Cashman, 

49:  342-348,  Oct.  1947. 
The  Processing  of  Two-Color  Prints  by 

Deep-Tank   Methods,   John   G.    Stott, 

49:  306-315,  Oct.  1947. 
Lighting  and  Exposure  Control  in  Color 

Cinematography,   Ralph  A.   Woodsey, 

48:  548-553,  June  1947. 
Photoelectric  Spectrophotometer  (Pacific 

Coast  Section  Meeting),  48:  272,  Mar. 

1947. 
Preliminary  Report  of  Research  Council 

Photocell     Subcommittee,     Lloyd     T. 

Goldsmith,    Chairman,    48:    145-147, 

Feb.  1947. 

Studio   Production   with   Two-Color   Bi- 
pack  Motion  Picture  Film,  John  W. 

Boyle,  ASC,  and  Benjamin  Berg,  48: 

111-115,  Feb.  1947. 
Inter-Society  Color  Council  Convention, 

48:  83-84,  Jan.  1947. 
Rapid  Test  for  Ferricyanide  Bleach  Ex- 
haustion,  L.    E.    Varden    and   E.    G. 

Seary,  47:  450-452,  Dec.  1946. 
Behavior  of  a  New  Blue-Sensitive  Photo- 
tube   in    Theater    Sound    Equipment, 

J.  D.  Phyfe,  46:  405-408,  May  1946. 
Preliminary  Sound  Recording  Tests  with 

Variable-Area  Dye  Tracks,  R.  O.  Drew 

and  S.  W.  Johnson,  46:  387-404,  May 

1946. 
A  Phototube  for  Dye  Image  Sound  Track, 

Alan  M.  Glover  and  Arnold  R.  Moore, 

46:  379-386,  May  1946. 
Sensitometric    Evaluation    of    Reversible 

Color  Film,  Ronald  H.  Bingham,  46: 

368-378,  May  1946. 
Ansco  Color  for  Professional  Motion  Pic- 
tures, H.  H.  Duerr  and  H.  C.  Harsh, 

46:  357-367,  May  1946. 


15 


Committee  Activities  and  Reports:  see  specific  subject  and  also  SOCIETY 
ACTIVITIES,  Committees— Reports 


CURRENT  LITERATURE. 


(These  are  reference  lists  of  articles  dealing  with  subjects  cognate  to  motion  picture 
and  television  engineering  published  in  a  number  of  selected  journals. ) 


55:  550, 
334, 

54:  762, 
510, 
120, 

53:  424, 
314, 

52:  701, 
602, 
498, 
239, 
114, 
552, 
445, 
217, 
106, 

50:  614, 
518, 


51 


Nov.  1950 
Sept  1950 
June  1950 
April  1950 
Jan.  1950 
Oct.  1949 
Sept.  1949 
June  1949 
May  1949 
Apr.  1949 
Feb.  1949 
Jan.  1949 
Nov.  1948 
Oct.  1948 
Aug.  1948 
July  1948 
June  1948 
May  1948 


48: 


415, 

301, 

94, 

49:  558, 
479, 
296, 
185, 
591, 
481, 
269, 
82, 

47:  519, 
353, 
182, 

46:  526, 
426, 
237, 
157, 


Apr.  1948 
Mar.  1948 
Jan.  1948 
Dec.  1947 
Nov.  1947 
Sept.  1947 
Aug.  1947 
June  1947 
May  1947 
Mar.  1947 
Jan.  1947 
Dec.  1946 
Oct.  1946 
Aug.  1946 
June  1946 
May  1946 
Mar.  1946 
Feb.  1946 


Densitometry:  see  SENSITOMETRY 
Developing:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE 


DISTRIBUTION— Foreign. 


American  Films  Abroad,  Orton  H.  Hicks, 
49:  297-306,  Oct.  1947. 

Dubbing  and  Post-Synchronization  Stu- 
dios, William  A.  Mueller,  47:  230- 
237,  Sept.  1946. 

Synchronization  Technique,  W.  A.  Poz- 
ner,  47:  191-211,  Sept.  1946. 


Motion  Pictures  Tomorrow,  W.  F.  Rod- 
gers,  47:  120-123,  July  1946. 

Army  Film  Distribution  and  Exhibition, 
Robert  A.  Kissack,  Jr.,  46:  26-29,  Jan. 
1946. 


Drive  Systems:  see  MOTOR-DRIVE  SYSTEMS 
Dubbing:  see  SOUND  RECORDING 
Edge-Numbering:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE 


EDITING  (see  also  LABORATORY  PRACTICE). 

Foreign  Versions,  V.  Volmar,  55:   536- 

546,  Nov.  1950. 
Television     Cutting    Techniques,     Rudy 

Bretz,  54:  247-267,  Mar.  1950. 
Improved  35-Mm  Synchronous  Counter, 

R.  A.   Sater  and  J.   W.   Kaylor,  52: 

333-336,  Mar.  1949. 
The  Newsreel— Its  Production   and  Sig- 


nificance:  Editing  the  Newsreel,  Dan 

Doherty:  47:  357-360,  Nov.  1946. 
A  Film   Noise  Spotter,  J.  P.   Corcoran, 

46:  124-127,  Feb.  1946. 
The  Filing  and  Cataloguing  of  Motion 

Picture   Film,   Carl   M.   Effinger,   46: 

103-110,  Feb.  1946. 


16 


EDUCATION. 


Motion  Picture  Instruction  in  Colleges 
and  Universities,  A  Follow-up  Study 
of  the  1946  Report  by  John  G.  Frayne, 
J.  Morrison,  55:  265-278,  Sept  1950. 

Use  of  16-Mm  Motion  Pictures  for  Edu- 
cational Reconditioning,  Edwin  W. 
Schultz,  51 1  424-430,  Oct.  1948. 

Library  and  Search  Service,  50:  93,  Jan. 
1948. 

Psychology  of  the  Sound  Film,  L.  Mercer 


Francisco,  49:    195-202,   Sept.   1947. 

Educational  Films  for  a  Democratic 
Tomorrow,  Eddie  Albert,  49:  191-194, 
Sept.  1947. 

Retooling  for  Education  1948,  W.  A. 
Wittich,  49:  187-191,  Sept.  1947. 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Motion  Pic- 
ture Instruction,  John  G.  Frayne, 
Chairman,  47:  95*106,  July  1946. 


Exchange  Practice:  see  DISTRIBUTION 

Exposure  Meters:  see  PHOTOMETRY 

Federal  Communications  Commission:  see  TELEVISION 

Fellow  Awards:  see  SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES 


FILM 


General 

Synthetic  Color-Forming  Binders  for 
Photographic  Emulsions,  A.  B.  Jen- 
nings, W.  A.  Stanton  and  J.  P.  Weiss, 
55:  455-476,  Nov.  1950. 

Specifications  for  Motion  Picture  Films 
Intended  for  Television  Transmission, 
C.  L.  Townsend,  55:  147-157,  Aug. 
1950. 

An  Experimental  35-Mm  Multilayer 
Stripping  Negative  Film,  J.  G.  Cap- 
staff,  54:  445-453,  Apr.  1950. 

The  Metal-Diazonium  System  for  Photo- 
graphic Reproductions,  R.  J.  H.  Alink, 
C.  J.  Dippel  and  K.  J.  Keuning,  54: 
345-366,  Mar.  1950. 

Air  Cooling  of  Motion  Picture  Film  for 
Higher  Screen  Illumination,  F.  J.  Kolb, 
Jr.,  53:  635-664,  Dec.  1949. 

Proposed  American  Standard  for  Wind- 
ing of  16-Mm  Sound  Film,  Z22.75, 
53:  298,  Sept.  1949. 

Will  Film  Take  Over  the  Television 
Commercial?,  J.  A.  Moran,  53:  120- 
123,  Aug.  1949. 

Television  Film  Requirements,  G.  D. 
Gudebrod,  53:  117-119,  Aug.  1949. 

Proposed  American  Standard  Cutting  and 
Perforating  Dimensions  for  35-Mm 


Motion  Picture  Combination  Positive- 
Negative  Raw  Stock,  Z22.1,  52:  449- 
450,  Apr.  1949. 

Films  in  Television,  Television  Commit- 
tee, D.  R.  White,  Chairman,  52:  363- 
383,  Apr.  1949. 

American  Standard  for  Cutting  and  Per- 
forating 35-Mm  Negative  Raw  Stock, 
Z22.34-1944,  Recommendation  for  Re- 
affirmation,  52:  358,  Mar.  1949. 

Proposed  American  Standard  Cutting  and 
Perforating  Dimensions  for  32-Mm  on 
35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Negative  Raw 
Stock,  Z22.73,  52:  229-230,  Feb.  1949. 

Proposed  American  Standard  Cutting  and 
Perforating  Dimensions  for  32-Mm 
Silent  Motion  Picture  Negative  and 
Positive  Raw  Stock,  Z22.72,  52:  227- 
228,  Feb.  1949. 

Proposed  American  Standard  Cutting  and 
Perforating  Dimensions  for  32-Mm 
Sound  Motion  Picture,  Negative  and 
Positive  Raw  Stock,  Z22.71,  52:  225- 
226,  Feb.  1949. 

Films  for  Television,  Jerry  Fairbanks,  51: 
590-594,  Dec.  1948. 

Improved  Safety  Motion  Picture  Film 
Support,  Charles  R.  Fordyce,  51:  331- 
350,  Oct.  1948. 


17     • 


FILM,  conf d 

International  Scientific  Film  Congress 
(London,  1948),  51:  211,  Aug.  1948. 

Television  Transcription  by  Motion  Pic- 
ture Film,  Thomas  T.  Goldsmith,  Jr., 
and  Harry  Milholland,  51:  107-116, 
Aug.  1948. 

New  One-Strip  Color-Separation  on  Film 
in  Motion  Picture  Production,  H.  C. 
Harsh  and  J.  S.  Friedman,  50:  &-13, 
Jan.  1948. 

Two  Microscopes  for  Measuring  the  Di- 
mensions of  35-Mm  Cine  Film,  O.  E. 
Conklin,  49:  537-543,  Dec.  1947. 

Callier  Q  of  Various  Motion  Picture 
Emulsions,  J.  G.  Streiffert,  49:  506- 
522,  Dec.  1947. 

American  Films  Abroad,  Orton  H.  Hicks, 
49:  297-306,  Oct.  1947. 

Psychology  of  the  Sound  Film,  L.  Mer- 
cer Francisco,  49:  195-202,  Sept. 
1947. 

American  Standard  Cutting  and  Perfo- 
rating Dimensions  for  35-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Positive  Raw  Stock,  Z22.36- 
1947  (Revision  of  Z22.36-1944),  49: 
179-180,  Aug.  1947. 

American  Standard  Cutting  and  Perfora- 
ting Dimensions  for  8-Mm  Motion  Pic- 
ture Negative  and  Positive  Raw  Stock, 
Z22.17-1947  (Revision  of  Z22.17- 
1941),  49:  176-177,  Aug.  1947. 

American  Standard  Cutting  and  Perforat- 
ing Dimensions  for  16-Mm  Sound 
Motion  Picture,  Negative  and  Positive 
Raw  Stock,  Z22. 12-1947  (Revision  of 
Z22.12-1941),  49:  174-175,  Aug. 
1947. 

American  Standard  Cutting  and  Perforat- 
ing Dimensions  for  16-Mm  Silent  Mo- 
tion Picture,  Negative  and  Positive 
Raw  Stock,  Z22.5-1947  (Revision  of 
Z22.5-1941),  49:  172-173,  Aug.  1947. 

Radar  Scope  Photography,  Richard  C. 
Babish,  48:  454-472,  May  1947. 

A  Unified  Approach  to  the  Performance 
of  Photographic  Film,  Television  Pick- 
up Tubes,  and  the  Human  Eye,  47: 
273-294,  Oct.  1946. 

American  Standard  Raw  Stock  Cores  for 
16-Mm  Motion  Picture  Film,  Z22.38- 
194.4,  47:  263,  Sept  1946. 

American  Standard  Raw  Stock  Cores  for 


35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Film,  Z22.37- 
1944,  47:  262,  Sept.  1946. 

American  Standard  Definition  for  Motion 
Picture  Safety  Film,  Z22.31-1946 
(First  Edition,  Z22.31-1941),  47:  261, 
Sept.  1946. 

Television  Reproduction  from  Negative 
Films,  E.  Meschter,  47:  165-181,  Aug. 
1946. 

A  New  Film  for  Photographing  the  Tele- 
vision Monitor  Tube,  C.  F.  White  and 
M.  R.  Boyer,  47:  152-164,  Aug.  1946. 

The  Use  of  Desiccants  with  Undeveloped 
Photographic  Film,  C.  J.  Kunz  and 
C.  E.  Ives,  46:  475-510,  June  1946. 

Educational,  Documentary  and  Training 

Use  of  16-Mm  Motion  Pictures  for  Edu- 
cational Reconditioning,  Edwin  W. 
Schultz,  51:  424-430,  Oct.  1948. 

Training-Film  Research  Project,  50:  93, 
Jan.  1948. 

Training-Film  Production  Problems,  Reid 
H.  Ray,  49:  203-208,  Sept.  1947. 

Psychology  of  the  Sound  Film,  L.  Mer- 
cer Francisco,  49:  195-202,  Sept 
1947. 

The  Simulation  of  Radar  Presentations 
for  Briefing  Purposes,  Joseph  West- 
heimer,  48:  586-590,  June  1947. 

Preservation  and  Postwar  Utilization  of 
U.  S.  Navy  Combat  Film,  Gerald  L. 
Sarchet,  48:  476-480,  May  1947. 

Blueprinting  the  Classroom  Film,  Frank 
S.  Cellier,  48:  243-252,  Mar.  1947. 

Technical  Problems  of  Film  Production 
for  the  Navy's  Special  Training  De- 
vices, H.  S.  Monroe,  47:  487-493,  Dec. 
1946. 

Naval  Training-Type  Epidiascope  for 
Universal  Projection  of  Solid  Objects, 
Jacques  Bolsey,  47:  418-425,  Nov. 
1946. 

Nonintermittent  Motion  Picture  Projector 
with  Variable  Magnification,  F.  G. 
Back,  47:  248-253,  Sept.  1946. 

The  Waller  Flexible  Gunnery  Trainer, 
Fred  Waller,  47:  73-87,  July  1946. 

Army  Film  Distribution  and  Exhibition, 
Robert  A.  Kissack,  Jr.,  46:  26-29,  Jan. 
1946. 


18 


FILM,  cont'd 
Libraries 

The  Newsreel-Its  Production  and  Sig- 
nificance: The  Film  Library,  Bert 
Hoist,  47:  365-366,  Nov.  1946. 

A  National  Film  Library— the  Problem  of 
Selection,  John  G.  Bradley,  47:  63- 
72,  July  1946. 

The  Filing  and  Cataloguing  of  Motion 
Picture  Film,  Carl  M.  Effinger,  46: 
103-110,  Feb.  1946. 

Preservation  and  Storage 

Film  Decomposition  Tests— Summary 
(British  Film  Institute),  54:  381-383, 
Mar.  1950. 

Spontaneous  Ignition  of  Decomposing 
Cellulose  Nitrate  Film,  J.  W.  Cum- 
mings,,  A.  C.  Hutton  and  Howard  Sil- 
fin,  54:  268-274,  Mar.  1950. 

Film  Vaults:  Construction  and  Use,  J. 
G.  Bradley,  53:  193-206,  Aug.  1949. 

Preservation  and  Postwar  Utilization  of 
U.  S.  Navy  Combat  Film,  Gerald  L. 
Sarchet,  48:  476-480,  May  1947. 

Specifications  on  Motion  Picture  Film  for 
Permanent  Records,  John  G.  Bradley, 
Chairman,  Committee  on  Preservation 
of  Film,  48:  167-170,  Feb.  1947. 

Test 

American  Standard  Scanning-Beam  Uni- 
formity Test  Film  for  16-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Sound  Reproducers  (Service 
Type),  Z22.81-1950,  55:  119,  July 
1950. 

American  Standard  Scanning-Beam  Uni- 
formity Test  Film  for  16-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Sound  Reproducers  (Labora- 
tory Type),  Z22.80-1950,  55:  118, 
July  1950. 

American  Standard  for  16-Mm  Sound 
Projector  Test  Film,  Z22.79-1950,  54: 
507,  Apr.  1950. 

16-Mm  Sound  Service  Test  Film,  54: 
375-376,  Mar.  1950. 

Television  Test  Film,  54:  209-218,  Feb. 
1950. 

American  Standard  Buzz-Track  Test 
Film  for  35-Mm  Sound  Reproducers, 
Z22.68-1949,  54:  108,  Jan.  1950. 

American  Standard  Sound  Focusing  Test 


Film  for  35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Sound 
Reproducers  (Service  Type),  Z22.61- 
1949,  54:  107,  Jan.  1950. 

Test-Film  Calibration— Proposed  Stand- 
ards, F.  J.  Pfeiff  and  E.  S.  Seeley,  52: 
434-446,  Apr.  1949. 

Motion  Picture  Test  Films  (Listing),  52: 
234-235,  Feb.  1949. 

American  Standard  1000-Cycle  Balanc- 
ing Test  Film  for  35-Mm  Motion  Pic- 
ture Sound  Reproducers,  Z22.67-1948, 
51:  545,  Nov.  1948. 

American  Standard  Scanning-Beam  Uni- 
formity Test  Film  for  35-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Sound  Reproducers  (Labora- 
tory Type),  Z22.66-1948,  51:  543- 
544,  Nov.  1948. 

American  Standard  Scanning-Beam  Uni- 
formity Test  Film  for  35-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Sound  Reproducers  (Service 
Type),  Z22.65-1948,  51:  542,  Nov. 
1948. 

American  Standard  Sound  Focusing  Test 
Film  for  35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Sound 
Reproducers  ( Laboratory  Type ) , 
Z22.62-1948,  51:  541,  Nov.  1948. 

American  Standard  Theatre  Sound  Test 
Film  for  35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Sound 
Reproducing  Systems,  Z22.60-1948, 
51:  539,  Nov.  1948. 

American  Standard  Specification  for 
Buzz-Track  Test  Film  for  16-Mm  Mo- 
tion Picture  Sound  Reproducers, 
Z22.57-1947,  51:  537-538,  Nov.  1948. 

A  Test  Reel  for  Television  Broadcast  Sta- 
tions, M.  R.  Boyer,  49:  391-394,  Nov. 
1947. 

Catalog  of  Research  Council  and  SMPE 
Test  Films,  49:  162-170,  Aug.  1947. 

Proposed  Standard  for  35-Mm  Flutter 
Test  Films-Report  of  the  SMPE  Com- 
mittee on  Sound,  49:  160-161,  Aug. 
1947. 

American  Standard  16-Mm  Test  Films 
(Reviewed  to  Date),  46:  511-515, 
June  1946. 

American  Standard  Method  of  Deter- 
mining Freedom  from  Travel  Ghost 
in  16-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture  Pro- 
jectors, Z22.54-1946,  46:  309,  Apr. 
1946. 

American  Standard  Specifications  for 
400-Cycle  Signal  Level  Test  Film  for 
16-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture  Projec- 


10 


FILM,  court 

tion  Equipment,  Z22.45-1946,  46:  297, 
Apr.  1946. 

American  Standard  Specification  for 
Multi-Frequency  Test  Film  for  Field 
Testing  16-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture 
Projection  Equipment,  Z22.44-1946, 
46:  296,  Apr.  1946. 

American  Standard  Specifications  for 
3000-Cycle  Flutter  Test  Film  for  16- 
Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture  Projectors, 
Z22.43-1946,  46:  295,  Apr.  1946. 

American    Standard    Specifications    for 


Sound-Focusing  Test  Films  for  16-Mm 
Sound  Motion  Picture  Projection 
Equipment,  Z22.42-1946,  46:  294, 
Apr.  1946. 

A  New  Recorder  for  16-Mm  Buzz  Track, 
M.  G.  Townsley,  46:  206-211,  Mar. 
1946. 

Wear 

The  Projection  Life  of  16-Mm  Film,  C. 
F.  Vilbrandt,  48:  521-542,  June  1947. 


GENERAL. 


U.S.  Naval  Underwater  Cinematography 
Techniques,  R.  R.  Conger,  55:  627- 
634,  Dec.  1950. 

Biological  Photographic  Association,  55: 
549,  Nov.  1950. 

Foreign  Versions,  V.  Volmar,  55:  53&- 
546,  Nov.  1950. 

American  Documentation  Institute,  54: 
648,  May  1950. 

Basic  Research  for  Motion  Pictures,  C. 
R.  Keith,  54:  127-128,  Feb.  1950. 

Industrial  Sapphire  in  Motion  Picture 
Equipment,  Walter  Bach  and  Chris 
Wagner,  54:  95-101,  Jan.  1950. 

Portable  Device  for  Measuring  Radiant 
Energy  at  the  Projector  Aperture,  A. 
J.  Hatch,  Jr.,  53:  363-367,  Oct.  1949. 

Navy  Electronic  Shutter  Analyzer,  W.  R. 
Fraser,  53:  256-267,  Sept.  1949. 

Engineering  Techniques  in  Motion  Pic- 
tures and  Television,  A.  N.  Goldsmith, 
53:  109-111,  Aug.  1949. 

Automatic  Tempo  Indicator,  B.  H.  Den- 
ney  and  George  Tallian,  52:  571-577, 
May  1949. 

Improved  35-Mm  Synchronous  Counter, 
R.  A.  Sater  and  J.  W.  Kaylor,  52:  333- 
336,  Mar.  1949. 

New  Automatic  Sound  Slidefilm  System, 
W.  A.  Palmer,  52:  320-325,  Mar.  1949. 

Frequency-Modulated  Audio-Frequency 
Oscillator  for  Calibrating  Flutter- 
Measuring  Equipment,  P.  V.  Smith 
and  Edward  Stanko,  52:  309-312, 
Mar.  1949. 


Inter-Society  Color  Council  Symposium- 
Foreword,  C.  R.  Keith,  52:  156,  Feb. 
1949. 

George  Mitchell  Receives  ASC  Award, 
52:  113,  Jan.  1949. 

Czechoslovak  Film  Standards,  51:  211, 
Aug.  1948. 

Display  Frames  in  the  Motion  Picture 
Theater,  Lester  Ring,  51:  101-103, 
July  1948. 

Light  Modulation  by  P-Type  Crystals, 
G.  D.  Gotschall,  51:  13-20,  July  1948. 

Inter-Society  Color  Council,  50:  183-185, 
Feb.  1948. 

Elimination  of  the  Fire  Hazard  of  Pro- 
jectors Using  Nitrate  Film,  Lloyd  Man- 
non,  50:  173-176,  Feb.  1948. 

Acoustical  Factors  in  the  Design  of  Mo- 
tion Picture  Equipment,  Howard  C. 
Hardy,  50:  139-148,  Feb.  1948. 

A  New  Slidefilm  Projector,  J.  McWilliams 
Stone,  50:  74-76,  Jan.  1948. 

Authors'  Instructions,  49:  480,  Nov.  1947. 

A  New  Sunshade  and  Filter  Holder  for 
16-  and  8-Mm  Motion  Picture  Cameras, 
James  T.  Strohm,  49:  468-470,  Nov. 
1947. 

Design  Progress  in  an  8-Mm  Projector, 
Thomas  J.  Morgan,  49:  453-462,  Nov. 
1947. 

A  Survey,  8-Mm  Problems,  Robert  E. 
Lewis,  49:  439-452,  Nov.  1947. 

American  Films  Abroad,  Orton  H.  Hicks, 
49:  297-306,  Oct.  1947. 


GENERAL,  cont'd 

Psychology  of  the  Sound  Film,  L.  Mer- 
cer Francisco,  49:  195-202,  Sept.  1947. 
Educational    Films    for    a    Democratic 

Tomorrow,  Eddie  Albert,  49:  191-194, 

Sept.  1947. 
Retooling   for   Education    1948,   W.    A. 

Wittich,  49:  187-191,  Sept.  1947. 
Some  Engineering  Aspects   of  Amateur 

Projection    Equipment    for    the    Mass 

Market,   Percival   H.   Case,  49:    139- 

146,  Aug.  1947. 

A  Stabilization  System  by  Rate  Measure- 
ment, Avery  Lockner,  49:  88-92,  July 

1947. 
Photographing  Things  to  Come,  M.  W. 

Warren,  49:  82-88,  July  1947. 
New  Electron  Tube   Standards    (RMA- 

NEMA),  48:  592-593,  June  1947. 
The   Simulation   of  Radar  Presentations 

for   Briefing   Purposes,   Joseph   West- 

heimer,  48:  586-590,  June  1947. 
Motion  Pictures  on  Operation  Crossroads, 

Richard  J.  Cunningham,  48:  554-559, 

June  1947. 
A  Proposed  Film  Lock  and  Identification 

Band,    Care   Schwartz,    48:    473-475, 

May  1947. 
Inter-Society  Color  Council  Convention, 

48:  83-84,  Jan.  1947. 
The  Determining  Role  of  Research  in  the 

Future  of  the  Motion  Picture,  Byron 

Price,  48:  70-72,  Jan.  1947. 
Engineering    Societies    Council,    Charter 

Members,  47:  524-525,  Dec.  1946. 
Naval    Training-Type    Epidiascope    for 

Universal  Projection  of  Solid  Objects, 


Jacques    Bolsey,    47:    418-425,    Nov. 

1946. 
Nonintermittent  Motion  Picture  Projector 

with    Variable    Magnification,    F.    G. 

Back,  47:  248-253,  Sept.  1946. 
The  Relation  of  Television  to  Motion  Pic- 
tures, Allen  B.  Du  Mont,  47:  238-247, 

Sept.  1946. 
Motion  Pictures  Tomorrow,  W.  F.  Rod- 

gers,  47:  120-123,  July  1946. 
The   Waller   Flexible   Gunnery   Trainer, 

Fred  Waller,  47:  73-87,  July  1946. 
The  Application  of  Pure  Mathematics  to 

the  Solution  of  Geneva  Ratios,  Ron  W. 

Jones,  47:  55-62,  July  1946. 
Report  of  Conference  on  Unification  of 

Engineering        Standards,        Ottawa, 

Canada  (Book  Review),  46:  425,  May 

1946. 
Electronic  Shutter  Testers,  R.  F.  Redem- 

ske,  46:  409-423,  May  1946. 
Colored  Trace  Oscillograms,  L.  S.  Trim- 
ble and  F.  W.  Bowden,  46:  231-236, 

Mar.  1946. 
The    Wartime     Record    and    Post-War 

Future  of  Projection  and  Sound  Equip- 
ment, Allen  G.  Smith,  46:    178-184, 

Mar.  1946. 
A    Survey    of    Phototemplate    Methods, 

Faurest    Davis,    46:     134-156,    Feb. 

1946. 
An  Integrating  Meter  for   Measurement 

of    Fluctuating    Voltages,    Harold    E. 

Haynes,  46:  128-133,  Feb.  1946. 
The  Filing  and  Cataloguing  of  Motion 

Picture   Film,   Carl   M.    Effinger,   46: 

103-110,  Feb.  1946. 


21 


HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY  (see  also  OSCILLOGRAPHY). 
General 

A  Survey  of  High-Speed  Motion  Picture 
Photography,  Kenneth  Shaftan,  54: 
603-626,  May  1950. 

High-Speed  Processing  of  35-Mm  Pic- 
tures, C.  M.  Tuttle  and  F.  M.  Brown, 
54:  149-160,  Feb.  1950. 

Report  of  High-Speed  Photography  Com- 
mittee J.  H.  Waddell,  Chairman,  53: 
602-603,  Nov.  1949. 

High-Speed  Motion  Pictures  in  Full  Color, 

F.  M.  Tylee,  53:  588-593,  Nov.  1949. 
Techniques  in  High-Speed  Cathode-Ray 

Oscillography,  C.  Berkley  and  H.  P. 
Mansberg,  53:  549-578,  Nov.  1949. 

Physical  Optic  Analysis  of  Image  Quality 
in  Schlieren  Photography,  H.  J.  Shafer, 
53:  524-544,  Nov.  1949. 

Recent  British  Equipment  and  Technique 
for  High-Speed  Cinematography,  G. 
A.  Jones  and  E.  D.  Eyles,  53:  502- 
514,  Nov.  1949. 

High-Speed  Motion  Picture  Photography 
(Review),  53:  440-450,  Nov.  1949. 

Navy  Electronic  Shutter  Analyzer,  W.  R. 
Fraser,  53:  256-267,  Sept.  1949. 

New  Developments  in  X-Ray  Motion  Pic- 
tures, C.  M.  Slack,  L.  F.  Ehrke,  C.  T. 
Zavales,  and  D.  C.  Dickson,  52:  61- 
70,  Mar.  Supplement,  1949. 

Methods  of  Analyzing  High-Speed  Photo- 
graphs, W.  S.  Nivison,  52:  49-60,  Mar. 
Supplement,  1949. 

Motion  Picture  Equipment  for  Very  High- 
Speed  Photography,  Brian  O'Brien  and 

G.  G.  Milne,  52:  42-48,  Mar.  Supple- 
ment, 1949. 

New  High-Speed  Stroboscope  for  High- 
Speed  Motion  Pictures,  K.  J.  Germes- 
hausen,  52:  24-34,  Mar.  Supplement, 
1949. 

Electrical-Flash  Photography,  H.  E. 
Edgerton,  52:  8-23,  Mar.  Supplement, 
1949. 

What  is  High-Speed  Photography?,  M. 
L.  Sandell,  52:  5-7,  Mar.  Supplement, 
1949. 

Foreword,  J.  H.  Waddell,  52:  3,  Mar. 
Supplement,  1949. 

Motion  Picture  Photography  at  Ten  Mil- 
lion Frames  Per  Second,  Brian  O'Brien 
and  Gordon  Milne,  52:  30-40,  Jan. 
1949. 


A  Survey  of  the  Application  of  Photog- 
raphy in  Naval  Research,  Testing,  and 
Development,  H.  H.  Bell  and  W.  R. 
Cronenwett,  49:  494-505,  Dec.  1947. 

Specialized  Photography  Applied  to  Engi- 
neering in  the  Army  Air  Forces,  P. 
M.  Thomas  and  C.  H.  Coles,  46:  220- 
230,  Mar.  1946. 

Applications 

High-Speed  Photography  of  Reflection- 
Lighted  Objects  in  Transonic  Wind 
Tunnel  Testing,  E.  R.  Hinz,  C.  A. 
Main  and  Elinor  P.  Muhl,  55:  613- 
626,  Dec.  1950. 

The  High-Speed  Photography  of  Under- 
water Explosions,  P.  M.  Fye,  55:  414- 
424,  Oct.  1950. 

High-Speed  Photography  Question  Box, 
55:  328,  Sept.  1950;  122,  July  1950. 

The  Pressurized  Ballistics  Range  at  the 
Naval  Ordnance  Laboratory,  L.  P. 
Gieseler,  55:  53-59,  July  1950. 

Photography  in  the  Rocket-Test  Program, 
C.  H.  Elmer,  54:  140-148,  Feb.  1950. 

Measuring  Shock  with  High-Speed  Motion 
Pictures,  J.  T.  Muller,  53:  579-587, 
Nov.  1949. 

Motion  Pictures  in  the  Guided-Missile 
Program,  H.  M.  Cobb,  53:  431-439, 
Nov.  1949. 

Applications  of  High-Speed  Photography, 
Max  Beard,  52:  97-106,  Mar.  Supple- 
ment, 1949. 

High-Speed  Photography  in  the  Automo- 
tive Industry,  R.  O.  Painter,  52:  90- 
96,  Mar.  Supplement,  1949. 

Use  of  High-Speed  Photography  in  the 
Air  Forces,  E.  A.  Andres,  Sr.,  52:  81- 
89,  Mar.  Supplement,  1949. 

High-Speed  and  Time-Lapse  Photograph)' 
In  Industry  and  Research,  H.  M, 
Lester,  52:  71-80,  Mar.  Supplement, 
1949. 

Kodachrome  Motion  Pictures  of  the  Hu- 
man Air  and  Food  Passages,  Paul  H. 
Holinger,  M.  D.,  and  J.  D.  Brubaker, 
49:  248-261,  Sept.  1947. 

Adaptations  and  Applications  of  16-Mm 
Motion  Picture  Equipment  to  Medical 
and  Scientific  Needs,  Mervin  W.  La 
Rue,  Sr.,  and  Mervin  W.  La  Rue,  Jr., 
49j  241-247,  Sept  1947. 


22 


HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY,  cvnt'd 

Cameras 

A  100,000,000  Frame  Per  Second  Camera, 
M.  Sultanoff,  55:  158-166,  Aug.  1950. 

A  Simplified  Body-Cavity  Camera,  A.  P. 
Neyhart,  54:  747-753,  June  1950. 

New  View  Finder  for  the  Fastax  Camera, 
A.  L.  Lidfeldt,  53:  598-601,  Nov. 
1949. 

Exposure  Meter  for  High-Speed  Photog- 
raphy, E.  T.  Higgons,  53:  545-548, 
Nov.  1949. 

Bowen  Ribbon-Frame  Camera,  E.  E. 
Green  and  T.  J.  Obst,  53:  515-523, 
Nov.  1949. 

Design  of  Rotating  Prisms  for  High- 
Speed  Cameras,  J.  H.  Waddell,  53: 
496-501,  Nov.  1949. 

Very-High-Speed  Drum-Type  Camera, 
K.  M.  Baird  and  D.  S.  L.  Durie,  53: 
489-495,  Nov.  1949. 

Half-Million  Stationary  Images  per  Sec- 
ond with  Refocused  Revolving  Beams, 
C.  D.  Miller,  53:  479-488,  Nov.  1949. 

Twenty-Lens  High-Speed  Camera,  C.  W. 
Wyckoff,  53:  469-478,  Nov.  1949. 

Improvements  in  High-Speed  Motion  Pic- 
tures by  Multiple-Aperture  Focal-Plane 
Scanners,  F.  E.  Tuttle,  53:  462-468, 
Nov.  1949. 

High-Speed  Motion  Pictures  by  Multiple- 
Aperture  Focal-Plane  Scanners,  F.  E. 
Tuttle,  53:  451-461,  Nov.  1949. 

Lenses  for  High-Speed  Motion  Picture 
Cameras,  A.  A.  Cook,  52:  110-115, 
Mar.  Supplement,  1949. 

Control  Unit  for  Operation  of  High-Speed 
Cameras,  L.  L.  Neidenberg,  52:  107- 
109,  Mar.  Supplement,  1949. 

Special  Cameras  and  Flash  Lamps  for 
High-Speed  Underwater  Photography, 
Robert  T.  Knapp,  49:  64-82,  July 
1947. 

Optical  Problems  of  the  Image  Formation 
in  High-Speed  Motion  Picture  Cameras, 
John  Kudar,  47:  400-402,  Nov.  1946. 

Specialized  Photography  Applied  to  Engi- 
neering in  the  Army  Air  Forces,  P.  M. 


Thomas  and  C.  H.  Coles,  46:  220-230, 
Mar.  1946. 

A  Wide  Angle  35-Mm  High-Speed  Mo- 
tion Picture  Camera,  John  H.  Waddell, 
46:  87-102,  Feb.  1946. 

Lighting 

Infrared  Photography  with  Electric-Flash, 
F.E.  Barstow,  55:  485-495,  Nov.  1950. 

The  Cine  Flash,  A  New  Lighting  Equip- 
ment for  High-Speed  Cinephotography 
and  Studio  Effects,  H.  K.  Bourne  and 
E.  J.  G.  Beeson,  55:  299-312,  Sept. 
1950. 

Electrical  and  Radiation  Characteristics 
of  Flashlamps,  H.  N.  Olsen  and  W. 
S.  Huxford,  55:  285-298,  Sept.  1950. 

The  Stroboscope  as  a  Light  Source  for 
Motion  Pictures,  R.  S.  Carlson  and  H. 
E.  Edgerton,  55:  88-100,  July  1950. 

Water-Cooled  High-Pressure  Mercury- 
Discharge  Lamp  for  Direct-Current 
Operation,  W.  Elenbaas  and  E.  W.  van 
Heuven,  53:  594-597,  Nov.  1949. 

High-Speed  Photographic  System  Using 
Electronic  Flash  Lighting,  W.  T. 
Whelan,  52:  116-129,  Mar.  Supple- 
ment, 1949. 

Lamps  for  High-Speed  Photography,  R. 
E.  Farnham,  52:  35-41,  Mar.  Supple- 
ment, 1949. 

Electronic  Flashtube  Illumination  for 
Specialized  Motion  Picture  Photog- 
raphy, Henry  M.  Lester,  50:  208-232, 
Mar.  1948. 

High-Speed  Motion  Pictures  with  Syn- 
chronized Multiflash  Lighting,  R.  A. 
Anderson  and  W.  T.  Whelan,  50:  199- 
207,  Mar.  1948. 

Special  Cameras  and  Flash  Lamps  for 
High-Speed  Underwater  Photography, 
Robert  T.  Knapp,  49:  64-82,  July 
1947. 

Specialized  Photography  Applied  to  Engi- 
neering in  the  Army  Air  Forces,  P.  M. 
Thomas  and  C.  H.  Coles,  46:  220- 
230,  Mar.  1946. 


23 


HISTORICAL 


Film-Collection  Program,  H.   L.   Walls, 

52:  5-8,  Jan.  1949. 
Origins  of  the  Magic  Lantern,  J.  Voskuil, 

51:  643-655,  Dec.  1948. 
Historical  Sketch  of  Television's  Progress, 

L.  R.  Lankes,  51:  223-229,  Sept.  1948. 
My  First  Fifty  Years  in  Motion  Pictures, 


Oscar  B.   Depue,  49:   481^193,  Dec. 

1947. 
Historical  Development  of  Sound  Films, 

E.    I.    Sponable,   48:    407-422,    May 

1947. 
Historical  Development  of  Sound  Films, 

E.  I.  Sponable,  48;  275-303,  Apr.  1947. 


Intermittent  Sprockets:  see  SPROCKETS 
Journal  Award:  see  SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES 
LABORATORY  PRACTICE  (see  also  EDITING X 

General 

Laboratory  Practice  Committee  Report, 
John  G.  Stott,  Chairman,  55:  213- 
215,  Aug.  1950. 

A  Method  of  Measuring  Electrification  of 
Motion  Picture  Film  Applied  to  Clean- 
ing Operations,  H.  W.  Cleveland,  55: 
37-44,  july  1950. 

American  Standard  Location  and  Size 
of  Picture  Aperture  of  8-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Projectors,  Z22.20-1950  (Re- 
vision of  Z22.20-1941),  54:  503-504, 
Apr.  1950. 

16-Mm  Film  Color  Compensation,  O.  K. 
Kendall,  54:  464-479,  Apr.  1950. 

An  Improved  Photomultiplier  Tube  Color 
Densitometer,  M.  H.  Sweet,  54:  35- 
62,  Jan.  1950. 

Lubrication  of  16-Mm  Films,  R.  H.  Tal- 
bot,  53:  285-292,  Sept.  1949. 

The  Picture  Splice  as  a  Problem  of  Video 
Recording,  F.  N.  Gillette,  53:  242-255, 
Sept.  1949. 

Motion  Picture  Laboratory  Practice  for 
Television,  A.  J.  Miller,  53:  112-113, 
Aug.  1949. 

Laboratory  for  Development  Work  on 
Color  Motion  Pictures,  H.  C.  Harsh 
and  K.  Schadlich,  53:  50-57,  July  1949. 

Metallic-Salt  Track  on  Ansco  16-Mm 
Color  Film,  J.  L.  Forrest,  53:  40-49, 
July  1949. 

Standard  Quality  of  Photographic  Chemi- 
cals, C.  V.  Otis,  52:  534-539,  May 
1949. 

Zero-Shift  Test  for  Determining  Optimum 
Density  in  Variable-Width  Sound  Re- 
cording, C.  H.  Evans  and  R.  C.  Lovick, 
52:  522-533,  May  1949. 

Improved  35-Mm  Synchronous  Counter, 
R.  A.  Sater  and  J.  W.  Kaylor,  52:  333- 


336,  Mar.  1949. 

Magnetic  Device  for  Cuing  Film,  J.  A. 
Larsen,  52:  326-332,  Mar.  1949. 

American  Standard  Specification  for  35- 
Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture  Release 
Prints  in  Standard  2000-Foot  Lengths, 
Z22.55-1947,  50:  284,  Mar.  1948. 

American  Standard  Method  of  Determin- 
ing Transmission  Density  of  Motion 
Picture  Films,  Z22.27-1947  (Revision 
of  Z22.27-1941),  50:  283,  Mar.  1948. 

American  Standard  for  Diffuse  Trans- 
mission Density,  Z38.2.5-1946,  50: 
282-283,  Mar.  1948. 

Improved  Film  Splicer,  Michael  Leshing, 
50:  68-73,  Jan.  1948. 

American  Standard  Emulsion  Position  in 
Projector  for  Direct  Front  Projection 
of  8-Mm  Silent  Motion  Picture  Film, 
Z22.22-1947  (Revision  of  Z22.22- 
1941),  49:  557,  Dec.  1947. 

American  Standard  Emulsion  and  Sound 
Record  Positions  in  Projector  for  Di- 
rect Front  Projection  of  16-Mm  Sound 
Motion  Picture  Film,  Z22. 16-1947 
(Revision  of  Z22.16-1941),  49:  556, 
Dec.  1947. 

American  Standard  Emulsion  Position 
in  Projector  for  Direct  Front  Projec- 
tion of  16-Mm  Silent  Motion  Picture 
Film,  Z22. 10-1947  (Revision  of 
Z22.10-1944),  49:  555,  Dec.  1947. 

Callier  Q  of  Various  Motion  Picture 
Emulsions,  J.  G.  Streiffert,  49:  506- 
522,  Dec.  1947. 

A  Photoelectric  Film  Cuing  System,  Ir- 
win  A.  Moon,  49:  364-371,  Oct.  1947. 

Current  Black-and-White  Duplicating 
Techniques  Used  in  Hollywood,  Nor- 
wood L.  Simmons  and  Emery  Huse. 
49:  31&-333,  Oct.  1947. 


24 


LABORATORY  PRACTICE,  cont'd 

A  New  Blooping  Device,  George  Lewin, 
48:  343-347,  Apr.  1947. 

Photoelectric  Spectrophotometer  ( Pa- 
cific Coast  Section  Meeting),  48:  272, 
Mar.  1947. 

A  New  Motion  Picture  Film  Splicer, 
Irving  I.  Merkur,  48:  238-242,  Mar. 
1947. 

The  Development  of  an  Invisible  16-Mm 
Film  Splice,  Ernest  Baumert  and 
Joseph  V.  Noble,  48:  231-237,  Mar. 
1947. 

Sensitometric  Control  of  the  Duping 
Process,  J.  P.  Weiss,  47:  443-449,  Dec. 
1946. 

Application  of  Methyl  Ethyl  Ketone  to 
the  Analysis  of  Developers  for  Elon 
and  Hydroquinone,  Vaughn  C.  Shaner 
and  Mary  R.  Sparks,  47:  409-417, 
Nov.  1946. 

An  Improved  Method  for  the  Determina- 
tion of  Hydroquinone  and  Metol  in 
Photographic  Developers,  H.  L.  Baum- 
bach,  47:  403-408,  Nov.  1946. 

A  Film-Splicing  and  Repair  Machine, 
Armour  Wallingsford,  47:  254-257, 
Sept.  1946. 

Aluminum  and  Chromium  as  Gelatin 
Hardeners,  H.  L.  Baumbach  and  H.  E. 
Gausman,  47:  22-54,  July  1946. 

Report  of  the  Subcommittee  on  16-Mm 
Film  Splices,  William  H.  Offenhauser, 
Jr.,  47:  1-11,  July  1946. 

The  Use  of  Desiccants  with  Undeveloped 
Photographic  Film,  C.  J.  Kunz  and 
C.  E.  Ives,  46:  475-510,  June  1946. 

Sensitometric  Evaluation  of  Reversible 
Color  Film,  Ronald  H.  Bingham,  46: 
368-378,  May  1946. 

Ansco  Color  for  Professional  Motion 
Pictures,  H.  H.  Duerr  and  H.  C.  Harsh, 
46:  357-367,  May  1946. 

American  Standard  Emulsion  Position 
in  Camera  for  8-Mm  Silent  Motion 
Picture  Film,  Z22.21-1946  (First  Edi- 
tion: Z22.21-1941),  46:  291,  Apr. 
1946. 

American  Standard  Emulsion  Position  in 
Camera  for  16-Mm  Silent  Motion  Pic- 
ture Film,  Z22.9-1946  (First  Edition: 
Z22.9-1941),  46:  289,  Apr.  1946. 

The  Measurement  and  Control  of  Dirt 
in  Motion  Picture  Processing  Labora- 
tories, N.  L.  Simmons  and  A.  C. 
Robertson,  46,  185-205,  Mar.  1946. 


An  Application  of  Direct-Positive  Sound 
Track   in    16-Mm   Release   Processing 
by  Duplication  Method,  G.  C.  Misener 
and    G.    Lewin,    46:    167-177,    Mar. 
1946. 

Printing 

35-Mm  Ansco  Color  Theater  Prints  From 
16-Mm  Kodachrome,  A.  Mosser  and  L, 
Dunn,  55:  635-638,  Dec.  1950. 

Electrical  Printing,  J.  G.  Frayne,  55: 
590-604,  Dec.  1950. 

Variable-Area  Sound  Track  Require- 
ments for  Reduction  Printing  Onto 
Kodachrome,  R.  V.  McKie,  55:  45- 
52,  July  1950. 

Illuminating  System  and  Light  Control 
for  16-Mm  Continuous  Optical  Printer, 
William  Bornemann  and  Wayne  Mc- 
Kusick,  54:  480-482,  Apr.  1950. 

Printing  Equipment  for  Ansco  Color 
Film,  F.  P.  Herrnfeld,  54:  454-463, 
Apr.  1950. 

Use  of  35-Mm  Ansco  Color  Film  for 
16-Mm  Color  Release  Prints,  R.  H. 
Ray,  53:  143-148,  Aug.  1949. 

Note  on  Improved  Filter  Holder  for 
Color  Printing,  Theodore  J.  Braun, 
53:  36-39,  July  1949. 

35-Mm-to-16-Mm  Sound  Reduction 
Printer,  C.  W.  Clutz,  F.  E.  Altaian, 
and  J.  G.  Streiffert,  52:  669-675,  June 
1949. 

16-Mm  Release  Printing  Using  35-  and 
32-Mm  Film,  Frank  La  Grande,  C.  R. 
Daily  and  B.  H.  Denney,  52:  211- 
222,  Feb.  1949. 

Masking:  A  Technique  for  Improving 
the  Quality  of  Color  Reproductions, 
T.  H.  Miller,  52:  133-155,  Feb.  1949. 

Improved  Optical  Reduction  Sound 
Printer,  J.  L.  Pettus,  51:  586-589,  Dec. 
1948. 

Optical  Sound-Track  Printing,  John  A. 
Maurer,  50:  458-473,  May  1948. 

A  Photoelectric  Method  for  Determining 
Color  Balance  of  16-Mm  Kodachrome 
Duplicating  Printers,  Paul  S.  Aex,  49: 
425-430,  Nov.  1947. 

American  Standard  Printer  Aperture 
Dimensions  for  Contact  Printing  16- 
Mm  Reversal  and  Color  Reversal  Du- 
plicate Prints,  Z22.49-1946,  46:  301, 
Apr.  1946. 


25 


LABORATORY  PRACTICE,  confd 

American  Standard  Printer  Aperture  Di- 
mensions for  Contact  Printing  16-Mm 
Positive  Prints  from  16-Mm  Negatives, 
Z22.48-1946,  46:  300,  Apr.  1946. 

American  Standard  Negative  Aperture 
Dimensions  and  Image  Size  tor  16- 
Mm  Duplicate  Negatives  Made  from 
35-Mm  Positive  Prints,  Z22.47-1946, 
46:  299,  Apr.  1946. 

American  Standard  16-Mm  Positive  Aper- 
ture Dimensions  and  Image  Size  for 
Positive  Prints  Made  from  35-Mm 
Negatives,  Z22.46-1946,  46:  298,  Apr. 
1946. 

Processing 

New  Laboratory  for  Processing  Mono- 
pack  Color  Film,  K.  Copal,  55:  639- 
646,  Dec.  1950. 

A  16-Mm  Rapid  Film  Processor,  J.  S. 
Hall,  A.  Mayer  and  G.  Maslach,  55: 
27-36,  July  1950. 

Simplification  of  Motion  Picture  Proc- 
essing Methods,  C.  E.  Ives  and  C.  J. 
Kunz,  55:  3-26,  July  1950. 

Note  on  Metol  Analysis  in  Photographic 
Developers,  Martin  Idelson,  54:  492- 
493,  Apr.  1950. 

High-Speed  Processing  of  35-Mm  Pic- 
tures, C.  M.  Tuttle  and  F.  M.  Brown, 
54:  149-160,  Feb.  1950. 

Chemical  Economics  of  Spray  Processing, 
G.  I.  P.  Levenson,  53:  665-690,  Dec. 
1949. 

Simultaneous  Determination  of  Elon  and 

Lenses:  see  OPTICS 

LIGHTING    (see  also  ARCS,  HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY,  PHOTOMETRY, 
and  SCREEN  BRIGHTNESS) 


Hydroquinone  in  Photographic  De- 
velopers, H.  L.  Rees  and  D.  H.  Ander- 
son, 53:  268-284,  Sept.  1949. 

Demineralization  of  Photographic  Wash 
Water  by  Ion  Exchange,  H.  P.  Gregor 
and  N.  N.  Sherman,  53:  183-192,  Aug. 
1949. 

Analysis  of  Developers  and  Bleach  for 
Ansco  Color  Film,  A.  H.  Brunner,  Jr., 
P.  B.  Means,  Jr.,  and  R.  H.  Zappert, 
53:  25-35,  July  1949. 

Processing  Control  Procedures  for  Ansco 
Color  Film,  J.  E.  Bates  and  I.  V.  Run- 
yan,  53:  3-24,  July  1949. 

Trend  Control  in  Variable-Area  Process- 
ing, F.  P.  Herrnfeld,  52:  97-102,  Jan. 
1949. 

Use  of  G-3  Film-Processing  Tank, 
Robert  E.  Lewis  and  Henry  C.  Froula, 
50:  474-488,  May  1948. 

A  Motion  Picture  Film-Developing  Ma- 
chine, R.  Paul  Ireland,  50:  50-53,  Jan. 
1948. 

The  Processing  of  Two-Color  Prints  by 
Deep-Tank  Methods,  John  G.  Stott, 
49:  306-315,  Oct.  1947. 

A  Processing  Control  Sensitometer,  Gerald 
A.  Johnson,  47:  474-481,  Dec.  1946. 

Rapid  Test  for  Ferricyanide  Bleach  Ex- 
haustion, L.  E.  Varden  and  E.  G.  Seary, 
47:  450-452,  Dec.  1946. 

A  Note  on  Chemical  Drag  Observed  with 
Variable-Density  Sound  Tracks,  E. 
Meschter,  46:  111-114,  Feb.  1946. 


General 

Infrared  Photography  with  Electric- 
Flash,  F.  E.  Barstow,  55:  485-495, 
Nov.  1950. 

Electrical  and  Radiation  Characteristics 
of  Flashlamps,  H.  N.  Olsen  and  W.  S. 
Huxford,  55:  285-298,  Sept.  1950. 

Spectral  Characteristics  of  Light  Sources, 
Norman  Macbeth  and  Dorothy  Nicker- 
son,  52:  157-183,  Feb.  1949. 

International  Commission  on  Illumina- 
tion, Colorimetry,  and  Artificial  Day- 
light, 50:  185-187,  Feb.  1948. 

The  Concentrated-Arc  Lamp  as  a  Source 


of  Modulated  Radiation,  W.  D.  Buck- 
ingham and  C.  R.  Deibert,  48:  324- 
342,  Apr.  1947. 

Report  of  the  SMPE  Committee  on  Pro- 
gress, W.  V.  Wolfe,  Chairman,  48: 
304-316,  Apr.  1947. 

Projection 

Interference  Mirrors  for  Arc  Projectors, 
G.  J.  Koch,  55:  439-442,  Oct.  1950. 

Physical  Principles,  Design  and  Perform- 
ance of  the  Ventarc  High-Intensity 
Projection  Lamps,  E.  Gretener,  55: 
391-413,  Oct.  1950. 

New  13.6-Mm  Hitex  Super  High-Inten- 


26 


LIGHTING*  confd 

sity  Carbon,  R.  M.  Bushong  and  W. 
W.  Lozier,  54:  725-731,  June  1950. 

The  Open-Air  Concentrated-Arc  Lamp, 
W.  D.  Buckingham,  54:  567-584,  May 
1950. 

New  Brenkert  Projection  System  for 
Drive-in  Theaters,  C.  N.  Batsel  and 
H.  J.  Benham,  54:  483-491,  Apr.  1950. 

New  Projection  Lamp  and  Carbon-Feed 
Mechanism,  J.  K.  Elderkin,  54:  87-94, 
Jan.  1950. 

Color  Measurement  of  Motion  Picture 
Screen  Illumination,  R.  E.  Harrington 
and  F.  T.  Bowditch,  54:  63-73,  Jan. 
1950. 

Air  Cooling  of  Motion  Picture  Film  for 
Higher  Screen  Illumination,  F.  J.  Kolb, 
Jr.,  53:  635-664,  Dec.  1949. 

Portable  Device  for  Measuring  Radiant 
Energy  at  the  Projector  Aperture,  A. 
J.  Hatch,  Jr.,  53:  363-367,  Oct.  1949. 

Effect  of  Carbon  Cooling  on  High-Current 
Arcs,  Wolfgang  Finkelnburg,  52:  407- 
416,  Apr.  1949. 

Optimum  Performance  of  High-Bright- 
ness Carbon  Arcs,  M.  T.  Jones  and  F. 
T.  Bowditch,  52:  395-406,  Apr.  1949. 

Determining  the  Light  Distribution  and 
Luminous  Flux  of  Projectors,  J.  Berg- 
mans and  H.  A.  E.  Keitz,  (Summary 
of  Philips  Tech.  Rev.,  9,  No.  4),  50: 
519,  May  1948. 

High-Intensity  Projection  Arc  Lamp, 
Charles  A.  Hahn,  50:  489-501,  May 
1948. 

Motion  Picture  Screen  Light  as  a  Func- 
tion of  Carbon-Arc-Crater  Brightness 
Distribution,  M.  T.  Jones,  49:  218-240, 
Sept.  1947. 

Light  Generation  by  the  High-Intensity 
Carbon  Arc,  F.  T.  Bowditch,  49:  209- 
217,  Sept.  1947. 

Recent  Developments  of  Super-High-In- 
tensity Carbon- Arc  Lamps,  M.  A.  Han- 
kins,  49:  37-47,  July  1947. 

Increased  Light  for  Projection  of  16-Mm 
Film  v/ith  Carbon  Arcs,  R.  J.  Zavesky 
and  W.  W.  Lozier,  48:  447-453,  May 
1947. 

Screen  Illumination  with  Carbon  Arc 
Motion  Picture  Projection  Systems,  R. 
J.  Zavesky,  C.  J.  Gertiser,  and  W.  W. 
Lozier,  48:  73-81,  Jan.  1947. 


Studio 

Lighting  Methods  for  Television  Studios, 

H.  M.  Gurin,  55:  576-589,  Dec.  1950. 
The  Cine  Flash,  A  New  Lighting  Equip- 
ment for  High-Speed  Cinephotography 

and  Studio  Effects,  H.  K.  Bourne  and 

E.  J.  G.  Beeson,  55:   299-312,  Sept. 

1950. 
CBS    Television    Staging    and    Lighting 

Practices,  R.  S.  O'Brien,  55:  243-264, 

Sept.  1950. 
Designing  Engine-Generator  Equipment 

for  Motion  Picture  Locations,   M.  A. 

Hankins   and  P.   Mole,   55:    197-212, 

Aug.   1950. 
Economy  in  Small-Scale  Motion  Picture 

Lighting,  A.  L.   Smith,  55:    180-188, 

Aug.  1950. 
Study  of  Sealed-Beam  Lamps  for  Motion 

Picture   Set    Lighting,    W.    Blackburn, 

55:  101-112,  July  1950. 
The  Stroboscope  as  a  Light  Source  for 

Motion  Pictures,  R.  S.  Carlson  and  H. 

E.  Edgerton,  55:  88-100,  July  1950. 
Effects  of  Incorrect  Color  Temperature  on 

Motion     Picture     Production,     F.     F. 

Crandell,  K.  Freund  and  L.  Moen,  55: 

67-87,  July   1950. 

Color  Temperature:  Its  Use  in  Color  Pho- 
tography, O.  E.  Miller,  54:  435-444, 

Apr.  1950. 
Lighting  Distortion  in  Television,  Richard 

Blount,  53:  625-634,  Dec.  1949. 
Television  Studio  Lighting,  A.  H.  Brolly, 

53:  611-624,  Dec.  1949. 
New  Portable   High-Intensity  Arc  Spot- 
light, R.  J.  Ayling,  53:  408-416,  Oct. 

1949. 
Report  of  the  Studio  Lighting  Committee, 

51:  656-666,  Dec.  1948. 
Report    of    Studio-Lighting    Committee, 

(1947),    C.    W.    Handley,    Chairman, 

51:  431-436,  Oct.  1948. 
New  Developments  in   Mercury  Lamps 

for  Studio  Lighting,  F.  E.  Carlson,  50: 

122-138,  Feb.  1948. 
Television  Studio  Lighting,  W.  C.  Eddy, 

49:   334-341,  Oct.   1947. 
Report  of  the  Studio  Lighting  Committee, 

49:  279-288,  Sept.  1947. 
Lighting  and  Exposure  Control  in  Color 

Cinematography,   Ralph   A.   Woodsey, 

48:  548-553,  June  1947. 


27 


LIGHTING,  confd 

A  Potential  Illuminant  for  Motion  Pic- 
ture Photography,  F.  E.  Carlson,  48: 
395-406,  May  1947. 

Flashtubes  for  Motion  Picture  Photog- 
raphy (Pacific  Coast  Section  Meeting), 
48:  181,  Feb.  1947. 

Modernization  Desires  of  a  Major  Studio, 
Loren  L.  Ryder,  47:  225-229,  Sept. 
1946. 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Standards, 
F.  T.  Bowditch,  Chairman,  47:  110- 
113,  July  1946. 


Carbon  Arcs  for  Motion  Picture  and  Tele- 
vision Studio  Lighting,  F.  T.  Bowditch, 
M.  R.  NuU  and  R.  J.  Zavesky,  46:  441- 
453,  June  1946. 

An  Appraisal  of  Illuminants  for  Television 
Studio  Lighting,  R.  E.  Farnham,  46: 
431-440,  June  1946. 

The  Theory  and  Practice  of  Lighting  for 
the  Camera,  Howard  T.  Souther,  46: 
254-271,  Apr.  1946. 

The  Illusion  of  Depth  in  Motion  Pictures, 
Howard  T.  Souther,  46:  245-253,  Apr. 
1946. 


Loudspeakers:  see  SOUND  REPRODUCTION 

Microphones:  see  SOUND  RECORDING 

Motion  Picture  Photography:  see  CINEMATOGRAPHY 

MOTOR-DRIVE  SYSTEMS 

Precision  Speed  Control,  A.  L.  Holcomb, 

52:  561-570,  May  1949. 
Method    and    Equipment   for    Checking 

Motion  Picture  Apparatus  Speeds,  C. 


T.  Owlett,  49:  471-478,  Nov.  1947. 
A  New  Selsyn  Interlock  Selection  System, 
Daniel  J.  Bloomberg  and  W.  O.  Wat- 
son, 47:  469-473,  Dec.  1946. 


MUSIC  (see  also  ACOUSTICS,  and  SOUND  RECORDING). 

Possibilities   of  a  Visible   Music,   R.   K. 
Potter,  52:  384-394,  Apr.  1949. 

NEW  PRODUCTS 


National  Cine  Equipment,  Inc.,  "T-Stop" 

Calibration  of  Lenses,  55:  556,  Nov. 

1950. 
Zoomar  Corp.,  //1.3,  15-Mm  Wide  Angle 

Balowstar,  55:  556,  Nov.  1950. 
S.O.S.  Cinema  Supply  Corp.,  Automatic 

16-Mm  Film  Processing  Machine,  55: 

555,  Nov.  1950. 

Heyer-Shultz,  Inc.,  Self-Centering  Film- 
Track  Pin-Hole  Plates,  55:  555,  Nov. 

1950. 
Buensod-Stacey,    Inc.,    Spray-Type    Air 

Washers,  Humidifiers  and  Dehumidi- 

fiers,  55:  555,  Nov.  1950. 
The   G-E   Electronic   Pointer,   55:    554, 

Nov.  1950. 
Greiner    Glass    Industries    Co.,    Special 

Viewfinder  Ground  Glass  for  35-Mm 

Motion  Picture  Cameras,  55:  451,  Oct. 

1950. 
Duncan  &  Bailey,  Inc.,  PM    Hysteresis 


Clutches    and    Brakes,    55:    450-451, 

Oct.  1950. 
Heyer-Shultz,  Inc.,  All-Metal  Reflectors, 

55:  450,  Oct.  1950. 
Photo    Research    Corp.,    Spectra   Three- 

Color  Meter,  55:  336,  Sept.  1950. 
G-E  Flashtube  No.  231,  55:  224,  Aug. 

1950. 
Fish-Schurman    Corp.,    Heat    (Infrared) 

Deflector,  55:  223,  Aug.  1950. 
Fastax  High-Speed  Motion  Picture  Cam- 
eras, 55:  223,  Aug.  1950. 
Hollywood   Camera  Exchange,   Line-Up 

Viewfinder,  55:  128,  July  1950. 
The  Westrex   1035  Magnetic  Recording 

System,  55:  127,  July  1950. 
Gibbs   Photodont   with   Kine   Exakta   V 

Camera,  54:  765,  June  1950. 
Photo  Research  Corp.,  Color  Densitom- 

eter,  54:  764,  June  1950. 
Reeves,  Videon  Projection  Television,  54: 

649,  May  1950. 


.     28     - 


NEW  PRODUCTS,  confd 

KCA,  Industrial  Television  System,   54: 

512-513,  Apr.  1950. 
Miles,    Reproducer    "Walkie-Recordall," 

54:  389,  Mar.  1950. 
Eastman,    16-Mm   Projector,   Model   25, 

54:  388-389,  Mar.  1950. 
Huggins    Ames,    Type   A    Mercury   Arc 

Lamp,  54:  243,  Feb.  1950. 
Mole  Richardson  Co.,  Blue  Comet  Boom 

Light,  54:  124,  Jan.  1950. 
\Veston,  Cadet  Exposure  Meter,  54:  123, 

Jan.  1950. 
Photovolt  Corp.,  Densitometer,  54:   122, 

Jan.  1950. 
Moss  and  Robinson,  Movie  Master,  54: 

122,  Jan.  1950. 
Bell    &    Howell,    Design    2709,    16-Mm 

Camera,  54:  121,  Jan.  1950. 
Theater   Control   Corp.,   Ticograph,   53: 

712,  Dec.  1949. 
Miles  Reproducer  Co.,  Recordall,  53:  711, 

Dec.  1949. 
Photo  Research  Corp.,  T-Stop  Calibration 

Service,  53:  607,  Nov.  1949. 
Photo  Research  Corp.,  Tele-Spot  Meter, 

53:  607,  Nov.  1949. 
The   Camera  Equipment  Co.,   Balanced 

"TV"  Tripod  Head,  53:  427,  Oct.  1949. 
General  Electric,  New  Filament  Lamp, 

53:  426-427,  Oct.  1949. 
Westrex  New  Theater  Amplifier  System, 

53:  318,  Sept.  1949. 
Westrex  100-Watt  Class  A  Amplifier,  53: 

317-318,  Sept.  1949. 
Moss    and    Robinson,    Stop   Watch    and 

Timer,  53:  317,  Sept.  1949. 
Westrex  Push-Pull  Conversion  Parts,  53: 

213-214,  Aug.  1949. 
Westrex    Double-Film    Attachment    and 

NEWSREELS  (see  also  PRODUCTION). 

The  Newsreel— Its  Production  and  Sig- 
nificance: Newsreel  Sound,  Warren  M. 
McGrath,  47:  371-375,  Nov.  1946. 

The  Newsreel— Its  Production  and  Sig- 
nificance: The  Newsreel  Cameraman, 
Walter  Mclnnis,  47:  368-371,  Nov. 
1946. 

The  Newsreel— Its  Production  and  Sig- 
nificance: The  Field  Unit,  Jack  Gor- 
don, 47:  367-368,  Nov.  1946. 

The   Newsreel-Its   Production   and   Sig- 


Loop  Adapter,  53:  212-213,  Aug. 
J.949. 

Westrex  Automatic  Rewind,  53:  212, 
Aug.  1949. 

General  Aniline  and  Film  Corp.,  Auto- 
matic Tristimulus  Integrator,  53:  106, 
July  1949. 

Photo  Research  Corp.,  Spectra  Direct 
Color  Temperature  Meter,  53:  106, 
July  1949. 

National  Cine  Equipment,  Inc.,  Variable- 
Speed  Motor,  52:  702,  June  1949. 

Bell  and  Howell,  Single-Case  Filmo- 
sound,  52:  360,  Mar.  1949. 

Miles  Reproducer  Co.,  Filmgraph,  52: 
359,  Mar.  1949. 

Brenkert,  Film  Projector,  52:  240,  Feb. 
1949. 

American  Cinefoto  Corp.,  Movette  Cam- 
era, 52:  116,  Jan.  1949. 

Transradio,  Ltd.,  Photocell  Cable,  52: 
116,  Jan.  1949. 

Recogram  Recorders  Co.,  Magnagram, 
52:  115,  Jan.  1949. 

Hallen  Development  Co.,  Synchronous 
Tape  Recorder,  51:  553,  Nov.  1948. 

Bell  and  Howell,  Heavy-Duty  Splicer, 
51:  553,  Nov.  1948. 

Arlington  Electric  Products,  Film  Coun- 
ter, Audio  Compensator  and  Phase 
Converter,  51:  218-219,  Aug.  1948. 

Yardley  Laboratories,  Synchro-Link, 
Pulsing  Drive,  and  Dyna-Link,  51: 
218,  Aug.  1948. 

Bell  and  Howell,  300-Watt  Printing 
Lamp,  50:  620,  June  1948. 

Photographic  Products  Inc.,  Photometer- 
ing  Unit,  50:  619-620,  June  1948. 

Radiant  Mfg.  Co.,  Portable  Tripod  and 
Baby  Boom  Light,  50:  619,  June  1948. 


nificance:  The  Film  Library,  Bert 
Hoist,  47:  36,5-366,  Nov.  1946. 

The  Newsreel— Its  Production  and  Sig- 
nificance: Women's  Fashions,  Vyvyan 
Donner,  47:  364-365,  Nov.  1946. 

The  Newsreel-Its  Production  and  Sig- 
nificance: Foreign  Editions,  Harry 
Lawrenson,  47:  361-364,  Nov.  1946.' 

The  Newsreel— Its  Production  and  Sig- 
nificance: Editing  the  Newsreel,  Dan 
Doherty:  47:  357-360,  Nov.  1946. 


-     29 


OBITUARIES. 


55:  657, 
219, 
219, 

53:  604, 
210, 
102, 

52:  353, 
231, 


Wise,  A.  G. 
Clark,  L.  E. 
Christensen,  H.  G. 
West,  A.  G.  D. 
Kurlander,  J.  H. 
Auger,   Edward 
Weber,  Charles  G. 
McNabb,  Joseph  H. 
Sheppard,  Samuel  Edward 

51 1  667, 

Barrows,   Thad  C.  442, 

Lumiere,   Louis  442, 

Armat,  Thomas  441, 

Gillette,  Melvin  E.      50:  290, 
Dickinson,  Arthur  S.  77, 

Lundie,  E.  S.  48:  482, 

Hawkins,  S.   E.  392, 


Dec.  1950  Strong,  L.  D.  392,  Apr.  1947 

Aug.  1950  Rayton,  Wilbur  B.  217,  Mar.  1947 

Aug.  1950  Denton,  H.  L.  84,  Jan.  1947 

Nov.  1949  Baker,  H.  W.  84,  Jan.  1947 

Aug.  1949  Robin,  Joseph  E.        47:  529,  Dec.  1946 

July   1949  Coates,  F.  C.  271,  Sept.  1946 

Mar.  1949  McAuley,  John  E.  271,  Sept.  1946 

Feb.  1949  Gaumont,  Leon  189,  Aug.  1946 
Samuels,  Irving          46:  533,  June  1946 

Dec.  1948  Langford,  LeRoy  P.  533,  June  1946 

Oct.    1948  Hopkins,  Robert  E.  533,  June  1946 

Oct.    1948  Johnston,  Robert  M.  430,  May  1946 

Oct.   1948  Hobart,  Morgan  L.  340,  Apr.  1946 

Mar.  1948  Tilles,  Israel  H.  340,  Apr.   1946 

Jan.  1948  Gilbert,  Franklin  C.  340,  Apr.  1946 

May  1947  Bamford,  William  B.  164,  Feb.  1946 

Apr.   1947  Cuthbertson,  Harry  B.  85,  Jan.  1946 


Optical  Printing:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE 


OPTICS. 


A  New  f/1.5  Lens  for  Professional  16- 

Mm  Projectors,  W.  E.  Schade,  54:  337- 

344,  Mar.  1950. 
Animar  Series   of  Photographic  Lenses, 

K.  Pestrecov  and  J.  D.  Hayes,  54:  183- 

198,  Feb.   1950. 
New  View  Finder  for  the  Fastax  Camera, 

A.    L.    Lidfeldt,    53:    598-601,    Nov. 

1949. 
Precision     Lens-Testing     and     Copying 

Camera,  M.  W.  La  Rue,  53:  379-388, 

Oct.  1949. 
Report  of  Lens-Calibration  Subcommittee, 

Rudolf  Kingslake,  Chairman,  53:  368- 

378,  Oct.  1949. 
Objective   Lenses   of  f/1   Aperture   and 

Greater,  E.  K.  Kaprelian,  53:   86-99, 

July  1949. 

New  Series  of  Lenses  for  16-Mm  Cam- 
eras, Rudolf  Kingslake,  52:   509-521, 

May  1949. 

New  Series  of  Lenses  for  Professional  16- 
Mm   Projection,   A.    E.    Neumer,    52: 

501-508,  May  1949. 
Lenses   for   High-Speed   Motion   Picture 

Cameras,   A.   A.   Cook,   52:    110-115, 

Mar.  Supplement,  1949. 
Zoomar  Lens   for  35-Mm   Film,    F.   G. 

Back,  51:  294-297,  Sept.  1948. 


Errors  in  Calibration  of  the  /  Number,  F. 
E.  Washer,  51:  242-260,  Sept.  1948. 

Optical  Problems  in  Large-Screen  Tele- 
vision, I.  G.  Maloff,  51:  30-36,  July, 
1948. 

Light  Modulation  by  P-Type  Crystals, 
vision,  I.  G.  Maloff,  51:  30-36,  July 
1948. 

A  New  Variable-Area  Recorder  Optical 
System,  J.  L.  Pettus  and  L.  T.  Sachtle- 
ben,  50:  14-36,  Jan.  1948. 

The  Optimum  Width  of  Illumination  of 
the  Sound  Track  in  Sound-Reproducing 
Optics,  Joseph  C.  Frommer,  49:  361- 
363,  Oct.  1947. 

Kodachrome  Motion  Pictures  of  the  Hu- 
man Air  and  Food  Passages  Paul  H. 
Holinger,  M.  D.,  and  J.  D.  Brubaker, 
49:  248-261,  Sept.  1947. 

Adaptations  and  Applications  of  16-Mm 
Motion  Picture  Equipment  to  Medical 
and  Scientific  Needs,  Mervin  W.  La 
Rue,  Sr.,  and  Mervin  W.  La  Rue,  Jr., 
49:  241-247,  Sept.  1947. 

Remote  Control  and  Automatic  Focusing 
of  Lenses,  H.  C.  Silent,  49:  130-139, 
Aug.  1947. 

A  Simplified  Method  for  Precision  Cali- 
bration of  Effective  /  Stops,  F.  G.  Back, 
49:  122-130,  Aug.  1947. 


30     • 


OPTICS,  con? d 

An  Instrument  for  Photometric  Calibra- 
tion of  Lens  Iris  Scales,  M.  G.  Towns- 
ley,  49:  111-122,  Aug.  1947. 

Compensation  of  the  Aperture  Ratio 
Markings  of  a  Photographic  Lens  for 
Absorption,  Reflection,  and  Vignetting 
Losses,  Irvine  C.  Gardner,  49s  96-110, 
Aug.  1947. 

Photometric  Calibration  of  Lenses— Pref- 
ace, R.  Kingslake,  49:  95,  Aug.  1947. 

The  Physical  Properties  and  the  Practical 
Application  of  the  Zoomar  Lens,  Frank 
G.  Back,  49:  57-63,  July  1947. 

An  Analysis  of  Low-Reflection  Coatings 
as  Applied  to  Glass,  W.  P.  Strickland, 
49:  27-36,  July  1947. 

A  Method  for  Determining  the  Shape  of 
the  Image  Surface  in  16-Mm  Projec- 
tion, F.  J.  Kolb,  Jr.,  A.  C.  Robertson 
and  R.  H.  Talbot,  48:  569-585,  June 
1947. 

Seminar  on  Optics  Held  (Midwest  Sec- 
tion Meeting),  48:  482,  May  1947. 

Auto-Collimator  and  Slide  Projector  De- 
scribed (Midwest  Section  Meeting), 
48:  271,  Mar.  1947. 

A  New  Series  of  Camera  Lenses  for  16- 
Mm  Cinematography,  W.  B.  Rayton, 


48:  211-216,  Mar.  1947. 

Zoom  Lens  for  Motion  Picture  Cameras 
with  Single-Barrel  Linear  Movement, 
Frank  G.  Back,  47:  464-468,  Dec. 
1946. 

Naval  Training-Type  Epidiascope  for 
Universal  Projection  of  Solid  Objects, 
Jacques  Bolsey,  47:  418-425,  Nov. 
1946. 

Optical  Problems  of  the  Image  Forma- 
tion in  High-Speed  Motion  Picture 
Cameras,  John  Kudar,  47:  400-402, 
Nov.  1946. 

Nonintermittent  Motion  Picture  Projec- 
tor with  Variable  Magnification,  F.  G. 
Back,  47:  248-253,  Sept.  1946. 

The  Photometric  Calibration  of  Lens 
Apertures,  Allen  E.  Murray,  47:  142- 
151,  Aug.  1946. 

A  Lens  Calibrating  System,  C.  R.  Daily, 
46:  343-356,  May  1946. 

American  Standard  Method  of  Determin- 
ing Resolving  Power  of  16-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Projection  Lenses,  Z22.53-1946, 
46:  307-308,  Apr.  1946. 

A  System  of  Lens  Stop  Calibration  by 
Transmission,  Emmanuel  Berlant,  46: 
17-25,  Jan.  1946. 


OSCILLOGRAPHY  (see  also  HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY). 

Techniques  in  High-Speed  Cathode-Ray 
Oscillography,  C.  Berkley  and  H.  P. 
Mansberg,  53:  549-578,  Nov.  1949. 

Cathodc-Ray-Tube  Applications  in  Pho- 
tography and  Optics,  Carl  Berkley  and 


Rudolf  Feldt,  53:  64-85,  July  1949. 
Wartime  Naval  Photography  of  the  Elec- 
tronic Image,  Francis  X.  Clasby  and 
Robert  A.   Koch,   50:    189-198,   Mar 
1948. 


Photography:  see  CINEMATOGRAPHY,  HIGH-SPEED  PHOTOGRAPHY,  and 
OSCILLOGRAPHY 

PHOTOMETRY  (see  also  LIGHTING,  OPTICS,  and  SCREEN  BRIGHTNESS )_ 


Effects  of  Incorrect  Color  Temperature 
on  Motion  Picture  Production,  F.  F. 
Crandell,  K.  Freund  and  L.  Moen,  55: 
67-87,  July  1950. 

Light  Measurement  for  Exposure  Control, 
Don  Norwood,  54:  585-602,  May  1950. 

An  Improved  Photomultiplier  Tube  Color 
Densitometer,  Monroe  H.  Sweet,  54: 
35-62,  Jan.  1950. 

Exposure  Meter  for  High-Speed  Photog- 
raphy, E.  T.  Higgons,  53:  545-548, 
Nov.  1949. 


A  Simplified  Method  for  Precision  Cali- 
bration of  Effective  /  Stops,  F.  G.  Back, 
49:  122-130,  Aug.  1947. 

An  Instrument  for  Photometric  Calibra- 
tion of  Lens  Iris  Scales,  M.  G.  Towns- 
ley,  49:  111-122,  Aug.  1947. 

Compensation  of  the  Aperture  Ratio 
Markings  of  a  Photographic  Lens  for 
Absorption,  Reflection,  and  Vignetting 
Losses,  Irvine  C.  Gardner,  49:  96-110, 
Aug.  1947. 


31 


PHOTOMETRY,  cont'd 

Photometric  Calibration  of  Lenses— Pref- 
ace, R.  Kingslake,  49:  95,  Aug.  1947. 

Lighting  and  Exposure  Control  in  Color 
Cinematography,  Ralph  A.  Woodsey, 
48:  548-553,  June  1947. 

The    Photometric    Calibration    of    Lens 


Apertures,  Allen  E.  Murray,  47:  142- 

151,  Aug.  1946. 
A  Lens  Calibrating  System,  C.  R.  Daily, 

46:  343-356,  May  1946. 
A  System  of  Lens  Stop  Calibration  by 

Transmission,  Emmanuel  Berlant,  46: 

17-25,  Jan.  1946. 


PHOTOTEMPLATES — 

A  Survey  of  Phototemplate  Methods,  Fan- 
rest  Davis,  46:  134-156,  Feb.  1946. 

PHOTOTUBES  (see  also  SOUND  REPRODUCTION). 

Lead-Sulfide    Photoconductive    Cells    in 

Sound  Reproducers,  R.   W.   Lee,   53: 

691-706,  Dec.   1949. 
The  Sensitivity  of  Various  Phototubes  as 

a  Function  of  the  Color  Temperature 

of  the  Light  Source,  A.  Cramwinckel, 

49:  523-529,  Dec.  1947. 
Preliminary  Report  of  Research  Council 

Photocell     Subcommittee     Lloyd     T. 

Goldsmith,    Chairman,    48:     145-147, 

Feb.  1947. 


Electronic  Shutter  Testers,  R.  F.  Redem- 
ske,  46:  409-423,  May  1946. 

Behavior  of  a  New  Blue-Sensitive  Photo- 
tube in  Theater  Sound  Equipment,  J. 
D.  Phyfe,  46:  405-408,  May  1946. 

Preliminary  Sound  Recording  Tests  with 
Variable-Area  Dye  Tracks,  R.  O.  Drew 
and  S.  W.  Johnson,  46:  387-404,  May 
1946. 

A  Phototube  for  Dye  Image  Sound  Track, 
Alan  M.  Glover  and  Arnold  R.  Moore, 
46:  379-386,  May  1946. 


Polarization:  see  STEREOSCOPY 

Post-Synchronization:  see  PRODUCTION,  and  SOUND  RECORDING 

Printing:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE,  and  SPECIAL  EFFECTS 

Process  Photography:  see  PROJECTION— Background,  and  SPECIAL  EFFECTS 

Processing:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE 


PRODUCTION. 


Motion  Picture  Production  for  Television, 
J.  Fairbanks,  55:  567-575,  Dec.  1950. 

Foreign  Versions,  V.  Volmar,  55:  536- 
546,  Nov.  1950. 

Research  Council  Small  Camera  Crane, 
Andre  Grot,  52,:  273-279,  Mar.  1949. 

New  York  Motion  Picture  Production, 
Edward  G.  Maguire,  50:  4-7,  Jan. 
1948. 

Training-Film  Production  Problems,  Reid 
H.  Ray,  49:  203-208,  Sept.  1947. 

Atlantic  Coast  Section  Inspects  New 
RKO  Pathe  Studios  and  Pathe  Labora- 
tories (Section  Meeting),  48:  391,  Apr. 
1947. 

Electronic  Fire  and  Gas  Light  Effect, 
Harold  Nye,  48:  353-360,  Apr.  1947. 

Improved  Engineering  Designs  for  Stage 


Doors,  Transparency  Screens,  and 
Water  Tank  Bulkheads,  A.  C.  Zoulis, 
48:  348-352,  Apr.  1947. 

Report  of  the  SMPE  Committee  on  Prog- 
ress, W.  V.  Wolfe,  Chairman,  48:  304- 
316,  Apr.  1947. 

The  Practical  Problems  of  16-Mm  Sound, 
Allen  Jacobs,  48:  116-125,  Feb.  1947. 

Dubbing  and  Post-Synchronization  Stu- 
dios, William  A.  Mueller,  47:  230-237, 
Sept.  1946. 

Modernization  Desires  of  a  Major  Studio, 
Loren  L.  Ryder,  47:  225-229,  Sept. 
1946. 

A  Complete  Motion  Picture  Production 
Plant  for  Metropolitan  New  York, 
Ralph  B.  Austrian,  47:  12-21,  July 
1946. 


32 


PROGRESS  COMMITTEE  REPORTS. 


Progress  Committee  Report,  C.  W.  Hand- 
ley,  Chairman,  54:  525-544,  May  1950. 

Report  of  SMPE  Progress  Committee, 
C.  R.  Sawyer,  Chairman,  52:  580-596, 
May  1949. 

Progress  Medal  Award:  see  SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES 


Report  of  SMPE  Progress  Committee,  C. 

R.    Sawyer,   Chairman,   50:    523-542, 

June  1948. 
Report  of  SMPE  Committee  on  Progress, 

W.  V.  Wolfe,  Chairman,  48:  304-316. 

Apr.  1947. 


PROJECTION 

Background  (see  also  SPECIAL  EF- 
FECTS) 

An  Experimental  Electronic  Background 

Television   Projection   System,   W.    R. 

Johnson,  55:  60-66,  July  1950. 
Sensitometric     Aspects     of     Background 

Process  Photography,   Herbert  Meyer, 

54:  275-289,  Mar.  1950. 
35-Mm  Process  Projector,  Harold  Miller 

and  E.  C.  Manderfeld,  51:  373-384, 

Oct.   1948. 
Improved  Engineering  Designs  for  Stage 

Doors,     Transparency     Screens,     and 

Water  Tank  Bulkheads,  A.  C.  Zoulis, 

48:  348-352,  Apr.   1947. 

16-Mm  and  8~Mm 

Trends  of  16-Mm  Projector  Equipment 
in  the  Army,  J.  A.  Moses,  55:  525- 
535,  Nov.  1950. 

A  Heavy-Duty  16-Mm  Sound  Projector, 
E.  C.  Fritts,  55:  425-438,  Oct.  1950. 

16-Mm  and  8-Mm  Motion  Picture  Com- 
mittee Report,  H.  J.  Hood,  Chairman, 
54:  754-755,  June  1950. 

American  Standard  Location  and  Size  of 
Picture  Aperture  of  16-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Projectors,  Z22.8-1950  (Re- 
vision of  Z22.8-1941  and  Z22.14-1941), 
54:  498-500,  Apr.  1950. 

A  New  f/1.5  Lens  for  Professional  16-Mm 
Projectors,  W.  E.  Schade,  54:  337-344, 
Mar.  1950. 

Proposed  American  Standard  for  16-Mm 
Projection  Reels,  54:  229-232,  Feb. 
1950. 

Recommendations  for  16-Mm  and  8-Mm 
Sprocket  Design,  54:  219-228,  Feb. 
1950. 

A  Sturdy,  High-Quality  16-Mm  Projector, 
G.  T.  Lorance,  F.  B.  Dibble,  and  H. 
J.  Reed,  54:  171-182,  Feb.  1950. 

New  Series  of  Lenses  for  Professional 
16-Mm  Projection,  A.  E.  Neumer,  52: 
501-508,  May  1949. 


Proposed  American  Standard  Location 
and  Size  of  Picture  Aperture  of  8-Mm 
Motion  Picture  Projectors,  Z22.20,  52: 
347-348,  Mar.  1949. 

Proposed  American  Standard  Location 
and  Size  of  Picture  Aperture  of  8-Mm 
Motion  Picture  Cameras,  Z22.19,  52: 
345-346,  Mar.  1949. 

Proposed  American  Standard  Location 
and  Size  of  Picture  Aperture  of  16-Mm 
Motion  Picture  Projectors,  Z22.8,  52: 
342-344,  Mar.  1949. 

Proposed  American  Standard  Location 
and  Size  of  Picture  Aperture  of  16-Mm 
Motion  Picture  Cameras,  Z22.7,  52: 
339-341,  Mar.  1949. 

Portable  16-Mm  Sound  Projector,  H.  H. 
Wilson,  51:  21-29,  July  1948. 

Sound  Motion  Pictures  for  Passenger 
Trains,  John  G.  Bitel,  50:  64-67,  Jan. 
1948. 

The  Movie-Sound-8  Projector,  Lloyd 
Thompson,  49:  463-467,  Nov.  1947. 

Design  Progress  in  an  8-Mm  Projector, 
Thomas  J.  Morgan,  49:  453-462,  Nov. 
1947. 

A  Method  for  Determining  the  Shape  of 
the  Image  Surface  in  16-Mm  Projec- 
tion, F.  J.  Kolb,  Jr.,  A.  C.  Robertson 
and  R.  H.  Talbot,  48:  569-585,  June 
1947. 

The  Projection  Life  of  16-Mm  Film,  C. 
F.  Vilbrandt,  48:  521-542,  June  1947. 

Proposals  for  16-Mm  and  8-Mm  Sprocket 
Standards,  J.  S.  Chandler,  D.  F.  Lyman 
and  L.  R.  Martin,  48:  483-520,  June 
1947. 

Increased  Light  for  Projection  of  16-Mm 
Film  with  Carbon  Arcs,  R.  J.  Zavesky 
and  W.  W.  Lozier,  48:  447-453,  May 
1947. 

Nonintermittent  Motion  Picture  Projector 
with  Variable  Magnification,  F.  G. 
Back,  47:  248-253,  Sept.  1946. 


33 


PROJECTION,  cont d 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  16-Mm 
and  8-Mm  Motion  Pictures,  D.  F.  Ly- 
man,  Chairman,  47:  107-110,  July 
1946. 

American  Standard  Reel  Spindles  for  16- 
Mm  Motion  Picture  Projectors,  Z22.50- 
1946,  46:  302,  Apr.  1946. 

35-Afro  (see  also  LIGHTING— Projec- 
tion) 

Interference  Mirrors  for  Arc  Projectors, 
G.  J.  Koch,  55:  439-442,  Oct.  1950. 

A  New  Deluxe  35-Mm  Motion  Picture 
Projector  Mechanism,  H.  J.  Benham 
and  R.  H.  Heacock,  55:  319-326, 
Sept.  1950. 

A  New  Heavy-Duty  Professional  Theater 
Projector,  H.  Griffin,  55:  313-318, 
Sept.  1950. 

Non-Intermittent  Motion  Picture  Projec- 
tion, W.  C.  Plank,  54:  745-746,  June 
1950. 

New  Brenkert  Projection  System  for 
Drive-In  Theaters,  C.  N.  Batsel  and 
H.  J.  Benham,  54:  483-491,  Apr. 
1950. 

Flicker  in  Motion  Pictures:  Further  Stud- 
ies, Lorin  D.  Grignon,  51:  555-573, 
Dec.  1948;  Errata,  52,  539,  May  1949. 

The  Gaumont-Kalee  Model  21  Projector, 
L.  Audiger  and  R.  Robertson,  51:  269- 
293,  Sept.  1948. 

Projection  Equipment  for  Screening 
Rooms,  H.  J.  Benham,  51:  261-268, 
Sept.  1948. 

American    Standard    Picture    Projection 


Aperture  of  35-Mm  Sound  Motion  Pic- 
ture  Projectors,  Z22.58-1947,  50:  286, 
Mar.  1948. 

Industrial  Control  Applied  to  the  Projec- 
tion Room,  M.  A.  Boyce  and  C.  W. 
Hyten,  50:  248-253,  Mar.  1948. 

Elimination  of  the  Fire  Hazard  of  Pro- 
jectors Using  Nitrate  Film,  Lloyd  Man- 
non,  50:  173-176,  Feb.  1948. 

Design  Factors  in  35-Mm  Intermittent 
Mechanisms,  Arthur  Hayek,  49:  405- 
414,  Nov.  1947. 

A  Proposed  Film  Lock  and  Identification 
Band,  Gare  Schwartz,  48:  473-475> 
May  1947. 

A  Projection  Reel  of  Improved  Design, 
Ellsworth  S.  Miller,  48:  261-268,  Mar. 
1947. 

Film  Projectors  for  Television,  Ralph  V. 
Little,  Jr.,  48:  93-110,  Feb.  1947. 

The  High  Cost  of  Poor  Projection,  Charles 
E.  Lewis,  47:  295-298,  Oct.  1946. 

American  Standard  Dimensions  for  Pro- 
jection Rooms  and  Lenses  for  Motion 
Picture  Theaters,  Z22.28-1946  (First 
Edition,  Z22.28-1941),  47:  259,  Sept 
1946. 

The  Waller  Flexible  Gunnery  Trainer, 
Fred  Waller,  47:  73-87,  July  1946. 

The  Application  of  Pure  Mathematics  to 
the  Solution  of  Geneva  Ratios,  Ron 
W.  Jones,  47:  55-62,  July  1946. 

The  Wartime  Record  and  Post- War  Fu- 
ture of  Projection  and  Sound  Equip- 
ment, Allen  G.  Smith,  46:  178-184, 
Mar.  1946. 


PULL-DOWN  MECHANISMS 

Non-Intermittent  Motion  Picture  Projec- 
tion, W.  C.  Plank,  54:  745-746,  June 
1950. 

Television  Recording  Camera  Intermit- 
tent, J.  M.  Wall,  54:  732-734,  June 
1950. 

35-Mm  Process  Projector,  Harold  Miller 
and  E.  C.  Manderfeld,  51:  373-384, 
Oct.  1948. 

Design  Progress  in  an  8-Mm  Projector, 
Thomas  J.  Morgan,  49:  453-462,  Nov. 
1947. 


A  Survey,  8-Mm  Problems,  Robert  E. 
Lewis,  49:  439-452,  Nov.  1947. 

Design  Factors  in  35-Mm  Intermittent 
Mechanisms,  Arthur  Hayek,  49:  405- 
414,  Nov.  1947. 

Nonintermittent  Motion  Picture  Projec- 
tor with  Variable  Magnification,  F.  G. 
Back,  47:  248-253,  Sept.  1946. 

The  Application  of  Pure  Mathematics  to 
the  Solution  of  Geneva  Ratios,  Ron 
W.  Jones,  47:  55-62,  July  1946. 


Re-recording:  see  SOUND  RECORDING 

•    34 


RESEARCH  COUNCIL 


Research  Council  Small  Camera  Crane, 

Andr<§  Grot,  52:  273-279,  Mar.  1949. 
Motion  Picture  Research  Council,  W.  F. 

Kelley,  51:  418-423,  Oct.  1948. 
Motion   Picture    Research    Council,    50: 

90,  Jan.  1948. 
Motion    Picture   Research    Council,    49: 

389,  Oct.  1947. 

Scoring:  see  SOUND  RECORDING 

SCREEN  BRIGHTNESS  (see  also  ARCS,  and  LIGHTING). 

Screen  Brightness  Committee  Report,  W. 

W.   Lozier,   Chairman,   54:    756-757, 

June  1950. 
Color   Measurement   of   Motion   Picture 

Screen  Illumination,  R.  E.  Harrington 

and  F.  T.  Bowditch,  54:  63-73,  Jan. 

1950. 
Portable  Device  for  Measuring  Radiant 

Energy  at  the  Projector  Aperture,  A. 

J.  Hatch,  Jr.,  53:  363-367,  Oct.  1949. 
Flicker  in  Motion  Pictures:  Further  Stud- 
ies, Lorin  D.  Grignon,  51:   555-573, 

Dec.  1948;  Errata,  52:  539,  May  1949. 

SCREENS 


Catalog  of  Research  Council  and  SMPE 
Test  Films,  49:  162-170,  Aug.  1947. 

Preliminary  Report  of  Research  Council 
Photocell  Subcommittee,  Lloyd  T. 
Goldsmith,  Chairman,  48:  145-147, 
Feb.  1947. 

Research  Council  Basic  Sound  Commit- 
tee: Discussion  of  Magnetic  Recording, 
48:  50-56,  Jan.  1947. 


Brightness  and  Illumination  Require- 
ments H.  L.  Logan,  51:  1-12,  July 
1948. 

Dynamic  Luminous  Color  for  Film  Pres- 
entation, R.  Gillespie  Williams,  F.I.E.S. 
(G.  B.),  50:  374-388,  Apr.  1948. 

Report  of  the  Screen  Brightness  Commit- 
tee, 50:  260-273,  Mar.  1948. 

Review  of  SMPE  Work  on  Screen  Bright- 
ness, Boyce  Nemec,  50:  254-259,  Mar. 
1948. 

American  Standard  Screen  Brightness  for 
35-Mm  Motion  Pictures,  Z22.39-1944, 
47:  264,  Sept.  1946. 


Characteristics  of  Motion  Picture  and 
Television  Screens,  F.  B.  Berger,  55: 
131-146,  Aug.  1950. 

Proposed  American  Standard  Sound 
Transmission  of  Theater  Projection 
Screens,  Z22.82,  55:  120,  July  1950. 

American  Standard  Dimensions  for 
Mounting  Frames  for  Theater  Projec- 
tion Screens,  Z22.78-1950,  54:  505- 
506,  Apr.  1950. 

SENSITOMETRY 

Principles  of  Color  Sensitometry  (Report 
of  Color  Sensitometry  Subcommittee), 
Herman  H.  Duerr,  Chairman,  54: 
653-724,  June  1950. 

Sensitometric  Aspects  of  Background 
Process  Photography,  Herbert  Meyer, 
54:  275-289,  Mar.  1950. 

Sensitometric  Aspect  of  Television  Moni- 
tor-Tube Photography,  Fred  G.  Albin, 
51:  595-612,  Dec.  1948. 

Callier  Q  of  Various  Motion  Picture  Emul- 
sions, J.  G.  Streiffert,  49:  506-522, 
Dec.  1947. 


American  Standard  Dimensions  for  Thea- 
ter Projection  Screens,  Z22.29-1948 
(Revision  of  Z22.29-1946),  51:  535- 
536,  Nov.  1948. 

American  Standard  Dimensions  for  Thea- 
ter Projection  Screens,  Z22.29-1946 
(First  Edition,  Z22.29-1941),  47:  260, 
Sept.  1946. 


A  Photoelectric  Method  for  Determining 
Color  Balance  of  16-Mm  Kodachrome 
Duplicating  Printers,  Paul  S.  Aex,  49: 
425-430,  Nov.  1947. 

A  Processing  Control  Sensitometer,  Ger- 
ald A.  Johnson,  47:  474-481,  Dec. 
1946. 

Sensitometric  Control  of  the  Duping 
Process,  J.  P.  Weiss,  47:  443-449,  Dec. 
1946. 

Sensitometric  Evaluation  of  Reversible 
Color  Film,  Ronald  H.  Bingham,  46: 
368-378,  May  1946. 


35 


SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES. 

General 


Staff  Changes:  55:  654,  Dec.  1950;  54: 

116,  Jan.   1950;  50:   516,  May  1948; 

49:  93-94,  July  1947. 
Representatives  to  Other  Organizations: 

54:    522,  Apr.    1950;  52:   Apr.    1949; 

50:  515,  May  1948. 
A  Restatement  of  Policy,  54:  233,  Feb. 

1950 
George  Eastman  House,  53:   710,  Dec. 

1949 

European     Advisory     Committee     (Per- 
sonnel and  Purpose  of),  53:  525,  Oct. 

1949 
Reprinting    Material    from    the    Journal, 

53:  309,  Sept.  1949 

Committee  Changes,  53:  308,  Sept.  1949 
Television  in  the  SMPE  (change  in  the 

name  of  the  Society),  52:   618,  June 

1949 

Awards  and  Citations 

Descriptions:    54:    113,    Jan.    1950;    52: 

474,  Apr.  1949;  50:  408,  Apr.   1948; 

48:    384,   Apr.    1947;   46:    333,   Apr. 

1946. 


Public  Relations,  52:  601,  May  1949 
Response  to  Journal-Contents  Question- 
naire, 52:  600,  May  1949 
Editorial   Policy   of  the   Journal,   C.   R. 

Keith,  52:  578-579,  May  1949 
The   Motion   Picture   Theater,   Planning 
and    Upkeep,    with    a    Foreword    by 
James  Frank,  SMPE  Publication,  52: 
457,  Apr.  1949 
Ten-Year    Index-1936-1945,    50:     521, 

May  1948 

Know  Your  SMPE,  49:  480,  Nov.  1947 
SMPE  Moves,  49:  390,  Oct.  1947 
Statement    of    SMPE    on    Revised    Fre- 
quency   Allocations,    Paul    J.    Larsen, 
48:  183-202,  Mar.  1947 


Fellow  Awards 

(1950)  55: 
Badgley,  G.  J. 
Beers,  G.  L. 
Bragg,  H.  E. 
Gage,  F.  W. 
Garman,  R.  L. 
Jones,  Watson 

649,  Dec.  1950 
Kolb,  F.  J.,  Jr. 
Livadary,  J.  P. 
Lodge,  W.  B. 
Nemec,  Boyce 
Rosher,  Charles 
WaddeU,  J.  H. 

(1947)  50:  85-86,  Jan.  1948 


Altman,  F.  E. 
Blaney,  A.  C. 
Brenkert,  Karl,  Sr. 
Brigandi,  P.  E. 
Dash,  C.  C. 
Hatch,  A.  J. 


Kingslake,  R. 
Linderman,  R.  G. 
Talbot,  R.  H. 
Townsley,  M.  G. 
Tuttle,  Fordyce 
Van  Niman,  R.  T. 


Yorke,  Emerson 


(1949)  53: 
Aiken,  J.  E. 
Best,  G.  M. 
Bloomberg,  D.  J. 
Duerr,  H.  H. 
DuMont,  A.  B. 
Eich,  F.  L. 
Farnsworth,  P.  T. 

(1948)  52: 
Albin,  F.  T. 
Arnold,  Paul 
Colburn,  G.  W. 
Crane,  G.  R. 
Dimmick,  G.  L. 
Edgerton,  H.  E. 
Goldsmith,  T.  T. 
Harsh,  H.  C. 


421,  Oct.  1949 
Fordyce,  C.  R. 
Grignon,  L.  D. 
Hankins,  M.  A. 
Misener,  G.  C. 
Seeley,  E.  S. 
Volkmann,  J.  E. 
Waller,  Fred 

108,  Jan.  1949 
Jones,  M.  T. 
Lyman,  D.  F. 
Mertz,  Pierre 
Neu,  O.  F. 
Scoville,  R.  R. 
Simmons,  N.  L. 
Slyfield,   C.   O. 
White,  H.  E. 


Zavesky,  R.  J. 

(1946)  47:  521,  Dec.  1946 
Austrian,  R.  B.  Moulton,  T.  T. 

Bertram,  E.  A,          Sachtleben,  L.  T, 
Boyle,  J.  W.  Shapiro,  Abraham 

Offenhauser,  W.  H.,  Jr. 

Honor  Rott 

Case,  Theodore  W.,  48:  437,  May  1947; 

47:  521,  Dec.  1946. 
Craft,  Edward  B.,  48:  440,  May  1947; 

47:  521,  Dec.  1946. 
Warner,  Samuel  L.,  48:  443,  May  1947; 

47:  521,  Dec.  1946. 

Honorary  Members 

Announcements:    55:    660,    Dec.    1950; 
54:  514,  Apr.  1950;  390,  Mar.  1950. 

(1950)  55:  650,  Dec.  1950 
Kellogg,  E.  W.  Zworykin,  V.  K. 


SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES,  contd 

Journal  Award 

Regulations  and  Former  Recipients:  54: 

641,  May  1950;  52:  475,  Apr.  1949; 
50:    408,   Apr.    1948;    48:    384,   Apr. 
1947;  46:  333,  Apr.  1946. 

(1950)  55:  650,  Dec.  1950 
Kolb,  F.  J.,  Jr. 

Hon.  Mention:  Robert  Herr,  C.  R.  Keith, 
B.  F.  Murphey,  Vincent  Pagliarulo  and 
W.  W.  Wetzel. 

(1949)  53:  419-421,  Oct.  1949 
Albin,  F.  G. 

Hon.  Mention:  C.  R.  Fordyce  and  J.  A. 
Maurer 

(1948)  52:  107-108,  Jan.  1949 
Chandler,    J.    S.;    Lyman,    D.    F.;    and 
Martin,  L.  R. 

(1947)  50:  84,  Jan.  1948 
Rose,  Albert 

(1946)  47:  520,  Dec.  1946 
Talbot,  Ralph  H. 

Progress  Medal  Award 

Regulations  and  Former  Recipients:  54: 

642,  May   1950;   52:   475,  478,   Apr. 
1949;   50:   409,  414,  Apr.   1948;   48: 
385,  Apr.  1947;  46:  334,  Apr.   1946. 

Zworykin,  V.  K.,  (1950),  55:   651-652, 

Dec.  1950 
Fletcher,  Harvey,  (1949),  53:  417,  Oct. 

1949 
Mole,  Peter,  (1948),  52:   104-105,  Jan. 

1949 
Frayne,  J.  G.,  (1947),  50:  80-81,  Jan. 

1948 

David  Sarnoff  Medal 
Announcement,  55:  653,  Dec.  1950 

Board  Meetings 

55:  647-648,  Dec.  1950 
216,  Aug.  1950 


Scrolls  of  Achievement 

47:  521-524,  Dec.  1946 

Westeni  Electric  Company,  Inc. 

Westinghouse  Electric  and  Manufactur- 
ing Company 

Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer  Studios 

RCA  Victor  Division,  Radio  Corporation 
of  America 

Twentieth  Century-Fox  Film  Corporation 

Lee  de  Forest 

Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc. 

General  Electric  Company 

47:  124-131,  Aug.  1946 

Presentation  of  Scroll  to  Thomas  Armat 
by  Donald  E.  Hyndman,  President 

Presentation  of  Scroll  to  Warner  Brothers 
by  Donald  E.  Hyndman,  President 

Special  Awards 

Plaque  Presented  to  Donald  E.  Hynd- 
man, 52:  597-599,  May  1949 

Citation  on  the  Work  of  Ralph  H.  Tal- 
bot, 48:  65-66,  Jan.  1947 

Citation  on  the  Work  of  Charles  J. 
Kunz,  Herbert  E.  Goldberg  and 
Charles  E.  Ives,  by  Glenn  E.  Mat- 
thews, 46:  1-3,  Jan.  1946 

Samuel  L.  Warner  Memorial  Award 
Regulations  and  Former  Recipients:  54: 

643,  May  1950;  52:  477,  Apr.  1949; 

50:    410,   Apr.    1948;   47:    525,   Dec. 

1946   ( Announcement ) . 
Fordyce,  Charles  R.,   (1950),  55:   650- 

651,  Dec.  1950 
Evans,  R.  M.,  (1949),  53:  418-419,  Oct. 

1949 
Levinson,  Nathan,  (1948),  52:  105-106, 

Jan.  1949 
Maurer,  John  A.,  (1947),  50:  82-83,  Jan, 

1948 


54:  644-645,  May  1950 
234,  Feb.  1950 


Committees— 

Listing  and  Personnel 

55:  337-340,  Sept.  1950 

(Engineering  Only) 

54:  515-522,  Apr.  1950 

52:  481-493,  Apr.  1947 

51:  312-322,  Sept  1948 

50:  505^514,  May  1948 

49:  289-295,  Sept.  1947 


48:  365-371,  Apr.  1947 
46:  315-321,  Apr.  1946 

Reports 

Laboratory   Practice   Committee   Report, 

John  G.  Stott,  Chairman,  55:  213-215, 

Aug.  1950 
Color  Committee  Report,  H.  H.  Duerr. 

Chairman,  55:  113-116,  July  1950 


•    87 


SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES,  cont'd 

Principles  of  Color  Sensitometry,  Report 
of  the  Color  Sensitometry  Subcommit- 
tee, Herman  H.  Duerr,  Chairman,  54: 
653-724,  June  1950 

Screen  Brightness  Committee  Report,  W. 
W.  Lozier,  Chairman,  54:  756-757, 
June  1950 

16-Mm  and  8-Mm  Motion  Picture  Com- 
mittee Report,  H.  J.  Hood,  Chairman, 
54:  754-755,  June  1950 

Progress  Committee  Report,  C.  W. 
Handley,  Chairman,  54:  525-544, 
May  1950 

Characteristics  of  Color  Film  Sound 
Tracks,  Color  Committee  Report,  L.  T. 
Goldsmith,  Chairman,  54:  377-378, 
Mar.  1950 

Report  of  SMPE  Standards  Committee, 
F.  E.  Carlson,  Chairman,  54:  102-105, 
Jan.  1950 

Report  of  High-Speed  Photography  Com- 
mittee, J.  H.  Waddell,  Chairman,  53: 
602-603,  Nov.  1949 

Report  of  Lens-Calibration  Subcommit- 
tee, Rudolf  Kmgslake,  Chairman,  53: 
368-378,  Oct.  1949 

Statement  on  Theater  Television,  Theater 
Television  Committee,  D.  E.  Hynd- 
man,  Chairman,  53:  354-362,  Oct. 
1949 

Progress  Report  —  Theater  Television, 
Barton  Kreuzer,  53:  128-136,  Aug. 
1949 

Report  of  SMPE  Progress  Committee,  C. 
R.  Sawyer,  Chairman,  52:  580-596, 
May  1949 

Films  in  Television,  Television  Commit- 
tee, D.  R.  White,  Chairman,  52:  363- 
383,  Apr.  1949 

Theater  Television,  Theater  Television 
Committee,  D.  E.  Hyndman,  Chair- 
man, 52:  243-272,  Mar.  1949 

Report  of  the  Studio  Lighting  Committee, 
M.  A.  Hankins,  Chairman,  51:  656- 
666,  Dec.  1948 

Report  of  Studio  Lighting  Committee 
(1947),  C.  W.  Handley,  Chairman, 
51:  431-436,  Oct.  1948 

Report  of  SMPE  Standards  Committee, 
F.  T.  Bowditch,  Chairman,  51:  230- 
241,  Sept.  1948 

Report  of  SMPE  Progress  Committee, 
C.  R.  Sawyer,  Chairman,  50:  523-542, 
June  1948 


Report  of  ASA  Committee  on  Standards 
for  Motion  Pictures,  Z22,  50:  274-278, 
Mar.  1948 

Report  of  Screen-Brightness  Committee, 

E.  R.  Geib,  Chairman,  50:   260-273, 
Mar.  1948 

Review  of  SMPE  Work  on  Screen 
Brightness,  Boyce  Nemec,  50:  254- 
259,  Mar.  1948 

Report  of  Studio  Lighting  Committee, 
C.  W.  Handley,  Chairman,  49:  279- 
288,  Sept  1947 

Proposed  Standard  for  35-Mm  Flutter 
Test  Films-Report  of  the  SMPE  Com- 
mittee on  Sound,  49:  160-161,  Aug. 
1947 

Proposed  Standard  Specifications  for 
Flutter  or  Wow  as  Related  to  Sound 
Records-Report  of  the  SMPE  Com- 
mittee on  Sound,  49:  147-159,  Aug. 
1947 

Report  of  the  SMPE  Committee  on 
Progress,  W.  V.  Wolfe,  Chairman,  48: 
304-316,  Apr.  1947 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Theater  En- 
gineering, Construction,  and  Opera- 
tion, Henry  Anderson,  Chairman,  48: 
173-175,  Feb.  1947 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Standards, 

F.  T.  Bowditch,  Chairman,  48:   170- 
173,  Feb.  1947 

Specifications  on  Motion  Picture  Film  for 
Permanent  Records,  John  G.  Bradley, 
Chairman,  Committee  on  Preservation 
of  Film,  48:  167-170,  Feb.  1947 

Report  of  Sectional  Committee  on  Motion 
Pictures,  Z22,  48:  163-166,  Feb.  1947 

The  ASA  Sectional  Committee  on  Motion 
Pictures,  Z22,  C.  R.  Keith,  Chairman, 
48:  67-69,  Jan.  1947 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Television 
Projection  Practice,  P.  J.  Larsen,  Chair- 
man, 47:  118-119,  July  1946 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Studio  Light- 
ing, C.  W.  Handley,  Chairman,  47: 
113-118,  July  1946 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Standards, 
F.  T.  Bowditch,  Chairman,  47:  110- 
113,  July  1946 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  16-Mm  and 
8-Mm  Motion  Pictures,  D.  F.  Lyman, 
Chairman,  47:  107-110,  July  1946 


38 


SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES,  cont'd 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Motion  Pic- 
ture Instruction,  John  G.  Frayne, 
Chairman,  47:  95-106,  July  1946 

Constitution  and  Bylaws 

54:  627-634,  May  1950 

367-374,  Mar.  1950  (Proposed  By- 
law Amendment) 

53:  304-307,     Sept.      1949     (Proposed 
New) 

52:  463-473,  Apr.  1949 

50:  397-407,  Apr.  1948 

Conventions 

68th,  Lake  Placid,  2V.Y. 

President's    Convention    Address,    E.    I. 

Sponable,  55:  559-561,  Dec.  1950 
Papers  Presented,  55:  658-660,  Dec.  1950 
Convention  Speech,  Terry  Ramsaye,  55: 

652-653,  Dec.   1950 
Announcements:    55:    647,    Dec.    1950; 

327,  Sept.  1950;  216,  Aug.  1950;  121, 

July  1950 

67th,  Chicago,  III 

Papers    Presented,    54:    768-770,    June 

1950 

Papers  Committee,  54:  760,  June  1950 
Announcements:  54:  645-646,  May  1950; 

379-380,   Mar.    1950;   235-236,   Feb. 

1950;  116,  Jan.  1950. 

66th,  Hollywood,  Calif. 

Papers  Presented,  52:  700,  June  1949 

Announcements:      53:     301-303,     Sept. 

1949;   207-209,  Aug.   1949;   100-101, 

July  1949. 

65th,  New  fork,  N.Y. 
Announcements:    52:    597,    May    1949; 

349-352,   Mar.    1949;   232-233,   Feb. 

1949. 


Report  of  the  Subcommittee  on  16-Mm 
Film  Splices,  William  H.  Offenhauser, 
Jr.,  47:  1-11,  July  1946 


48:  372-383,  Apr.  1947 

47:  527,  Dec.  1946  (Amendment  to  By- 
laws) 

268-269,    Sept.    1946    (Amendment 
to  Bylaws) 

46:  322-333,  Apr.  1946 


64th,  Washington,  D.C. 
Announcements:  52:  103-108,  Jan.  1949; 

51:    323-326,    Sept.    1948;    212-213, 

Aug.  1948;  104,  July  1948. 

63rd,  Santa  Monica,  Calif. 

Papers    Presented,    50:    416-420,    Apr. 

1948 
Announcements:      50:      291-296,     Mar. 

1948;  177,  Feb.  1948. 

62nd,  New  fork,  N.Y. 
Papers  Presented,  50:  90,  Jan.  1948 
Announcements:   50:   78-79,  Jan.   1948; 
49:   181-184,  Aug.  1947. 

61st,  Chicago,  III. 

Announcements:      48:      176-180,     Feb. 
1947;  85-89,  Jan.  1947. 

60th,  Hollywood,  Calif. 
Announcements:     47:     265-268,     Sept. 

1946;     184-188,    Aug.    1947;    88-92, 

July  1946. 

59th,  New  fork,  2V.Y. 

Announcements:      46:      528-533,     June 

1946;   239-242,  Mar.   1946;   160-163, 

Feb.  1946. 


Engineering  Activities  (News  and  Brief  Reports). 
55:  654-656,  Dec.  1950 

547,  Nov.  1950 

443,  Oct.  1950 

327,  Sept.  1950 

217,  Aug.  1950 

123,  July  1950 

Financial  Reports 

54:  638-639,  May  1950  (For  1949) 
52:  479,  Apr.  1949  (For  1948) 
50:  413,  Apr.  1948  (For  1947) 


54:  758-759,  June  1950 

509-510,  Apr.  1950 

384-385,  Mar.  1950 

237-239,  Feb.  1950 

111,  Jan.  1950 
52:  628,  June  1949  (Theater  Television) 


48:  388-389,  Apr.  1947  (For  1946) 
46:  336,  Apr.  1946  (For  1945) 


39 


SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES,  cont'd 

Letters  to  the  Editor 

Norwood,  Don        55:  447,  Oct.  1950 
Dunn,  J.  F.  446,  Oct.  1950 

Lindgren,  E.  218,  Aug.  1950 

Spray,  J.  H.  125,  July  1950 

Cummings,  J.  W.    54:  766,  June  1950 

Membership   and   Subscriptions 

Committee  Reports 
54:  640,  May  1950  (For  1949) 
52:  480,  Apr.  1949  (For  1948) 
50:  412,  Apr.  1948  (For  1947) 

92,  Jan.  1948 

48:  387,  Apr.  1947  (For  1946) 
46:  310-311,  Apr.  1946  (For  1945) 

Membership  Directory 

54:  2-70,  Part  II,  May  1950 

48:  594-600,  June  1947  (Supplementary) 

Nominations 

54:  113,  Jan.  1950 

52:  356,  Mar.  1949 

238,  Feb.  1949 

50:  297,  Mar.  1948 

Officers  and  Governors  of  the  Society 

54:  635-637,  May  1950 

109,  Jan.  1950 
52:  458-461,  Apr.  1949 
50:  393-396,  Apr.  1948 

Officers'  Reports 

A  Progress  Report  of  Engineering  Com- 
mittee Work,  F.  T.  Bowditch,  Engi- 
neering Vice-President,  55:  547-548, 
Nov.  1950 

Report  of  the  President,  E.  I.  Sponable, 
54:  3-7,  Jan.  1950 

Your  Society— Report  of  the  Executive 
Secretary,  Boyce  Nemec,  52:  453-457, 
Apr.  1949 

Report  of  the  President,  L.  L.  Ryder, 
52:  3-4,  Jan.  1949 

Report  of  the  President,  L.  L.  Ryder, 
51 1  221-222,  Sept.  1948 

Section  Activities 

Officers  and  Managers 
54:  637,  May  1950 
52:  462,  Apr.  1949 
51:  554,  Nov.  1948 

447,  Oct.  1948 

220,  Aug.  1948 


Spray,  J.  H. 

Baker,  J.  L. 
Mahan,  A.  I. 
Seaiy,  E.  G. 


765-766,  June 

1950 

650,  May  1950 

387,  Mar.  1950 

53:  425,  Oct.  1949 


Membership  Certificates 
53:  307,  Sept  1949 

Subscription  Rates 
52:  352,  Mar.  1949 
47:  528,  Dec,  1946  (Increase) 
442,  Nov.  1946  (Increase) 

Membership  Dues 
47 1  528,  Dec.  1946  (Increase) 
441-442,  Nov.  1946 


181-182,  Feb.  1948 
48:  273,  Mar.  1947 

181,  Feb.  1947 
46:  337,  Apr.  1946 


178-179,  Feb.  1948 
48:  361-364,  Apr.  1947 
47:  527,  Dec.  1946 
46:  312-314,  Apr.  1946 


Report  of  the  President,  L.  L.  Ryder, 
50:  1-3,  Jan.  1948 

Report  of  the  President,  L.  L.  Ryder, 
49:  1,  July  1947 

Report  of  the  General  Secretary,  C.  R. 
Keith,  48:  203-210,  Mar.  1947 

Achievements  of  the  SMPE  for  1946, 
Donald  E.  Hyndman,  President,  48: 
63-64,  Jan.  1947 

The  Past  and  Future  Activities  of  the 
Society  of  Motion  Picture  Engineers 
Donald  E.  Hyndman,  President,  and 
John  A.  Maurer,  Engineering  Vice- 
President,  47:  212-224,  Sept.  1946 


87,  Jan.  1948 
50:  618,  June  1948 
396,  Apr.  1948 
296,  Mar.  1948 
48:  361-364,  Apr.  1947 
47:  527,  Dec.  1946 


40 


SOCIETY  ACTIVITIES,  cont'd 
Atlantic  Coast 

54:  761,  June  1950 

387,  Mar.  1950 

240,  Feb.  1950 

115,  Jan.  1950 
53:  707,  Dec.  1949 

310,  Sept.  1949 
52i  495,  Apr.  1949 
51:  549,  Nov.  1948 
50:  298,  Mar.  1948 

179-180,  182,  Feb.  1948 
48:  391,  Apr.  1947 

271,  Mar.  1947 

180,  Feb.  1947 
47:  525,  Dec.  1946 

441,  Nov.  1946 
46:  428-429,  May  1946 

337,  Apr.  1946 

164,  Feb.  1946 

85,  Jan.  1946 

Central 

55:  220,  Aug.  1950 
54:  387,  Mar.  1950 

240,  Feb.  1950 

115-116,  Jan.  1950 
53:  707,  Dec.  1949 

310-312,  Sept.  1949 

211,  Aug.  1949 
52:  699,  June  1949 

601,  May  1949 

495-496,  Apr.  1949 

354,  Mar.  1949 

110,  Jan.  1949 
51:  549,  Nov.  1948 

327-329,  Sept.  1948 


216,  Aug.  1948 
50:  617,  June  1948 

517-518,  May  1948 

298,  Mar.  1948 

180,  Feb.  1948 

91-92,  Jan.  1948 
48:  482,  May  1947 

392,  Apr.  1947 

271-272,  Mar.  1947 

180,  Feb.  1947 

83,  Jan.  1947 
47:  525-526,  Dec.  1946 

441,  Nov.  1946 

92,  July  1946 
46:  527,  June  1946 

Pacific  Coast 

54:  761,  June  1950 

387,  Mar.  1950 

240,  Feb.  1950 
52:  110,  Jan.  1949 
50:  517-518,  May  1948 

180,  Feb.  1948 
49:  558,  Dec.  1947 
48:  272,  Mar.  1947 

181,  Feb.  1947 
47:  526,  Dec.  1946 

92-93,  July  1946 
46:  429,  May  1946 
337,  Apr.  1946 
164,  Feb.  1946 

Student  Chapters 

54:  637,  May  1950  (Officers  and  Man 

agers) 

380,  Mar.  1950  (N.Y.U.) 
50:  180,  Feb.  1948  (U.S.C.) 


SOUND  RECORDING 

General 

Electrical  Printing,  J.  G.  Frayne,  55:  590- 

604,  Dec.  1950. 
Flutter  Measuring  Set,  F.  P.  Herrnfeld, 

55:  167-172,  Aug.  1950. 
Miniature  Condenser  Microphone,  J.  K. 

Hilliard,  54:  303-314,  Mar.  1950. 
Noise  Considerations  in  Sound-Recording 

Transmission  Systems,  F.  L.  Hopper, 

54:  129-139,  Feb.  1950. 
Recording    Equipment    Throughout    the 

World,  R.  E.  Warn,  53:  236-241,  Sept 

1949. 
Preselection  of  Variable-Gain  Tubes  for 


Compressors,  Kurt  Singer,  52:  684-689, 

June  1949. 
High-Quality  Recording  Electronic  Mixer, 

Kurt  Singer,  52:  676-683,  June  1949. 
Automatic  Tempo  Indicator,  B.  H.  Den- 

ney  and  George  Tallian,  52:  571-577, 

May  1949. 
Precision  Speed  Control,  A.  L.  Holcomb, 

52:  561-570,  May  1949. 
Synchronous  Disk  Recorder  Drive,  C.  C. 

Davis,  52:  427-433,  Apr.  1949. 
Disk  Recorder  for  Motion  Picture  Produc- 
tion, J.  L.  Pettus,  52:  417-426,  Apr. 

1949. 


41 


SOUND  RECORDING,  cont'd 

Possibilities  of  a  Visible  Music,  R.  K. 
Potter,  52:  384-394,  Apr.  1949. 

Frequency-Modulated  Audio-Frequency 
Oscillator  for  Calibrating  Flutter-Meas- 
uring Equipment,  P.  V.  Smith  and 
E.  Stanko,  52:  309-312,  Mar.  1949. 

Single-Element  Unidirectional  Micro- 
phone, H.  F.  Olsen  and  John  Preston, 
52:  293-302,  Mar.  1949. 

Experiment  in  Stereophonic  Sound,  L.  D. 
Grignon,  52:  280-292,  Mar.  1949. 

Volume  Compressors  for  Sound  Record- 
ing, W.  K.  Grimwood,  52:  49-70,  Jan. 
1949. 

Comparison  of  Lead-Sulfide  Photoconduc- 
tive  Cells  with  Photoemissive  Tubes, 
Norman  Anderson  and  Serge  Pakswer, 
52:  41-48,  Jan.  1949. 

American  Standard  Sound  Records  and 
Scanning  Area  of  Double  Width  Push- 
Pull  Sound  Prints  (Offset  Centerline 
Type),  Z22.70-1948,  51:  548,  Nov. 
1948. 

American  Standard  Sound  Records  and 
Scanning  Area  of  Double  Width  Push- 
Pull  Sound  Prints  (Normal  Centerline 
Type),  Z22.69-1948,  51:  547,  Nov. 
1948. 

Proposed  Standards  for  the  Measurement 
of  Distortion  in  Sound  Recording,  Ed- 
ward W.  Kellogg,  Chairman,  51:  449- 
467,  Nov.  1948. 

Parabolic  Sound  Concentrators,  R.  C. 
Coile,  51:  298-311,  Sept.  1948. 

Continuously  Variable  Band-Elimination 
Filter,  Kurt  Singer,  51:  203-210,  Aug. 
1948. 

Optical  Sound-Track  Printing,  John  A. 
Maurer,  50:  458-473,  May  1948. 

An  Improved  Intermodulation  Measuring 
System,  G.  W.  Read  and  R.  R.  Scoville, 
50:  162-173,  Feb.  1948. 

Cathode-Ray-Oscillograph  Images  of 
Noise-Reduction  Envelopes,  B.  H.  Den- 
ney,  50:  37-49,  Jan.  1948. 

A  Microphone  Tilting  Device,  B.  H.  Den- 
ney  and  R.  J.  Carr,  49:  530-536,  Dec. 
1947. 

Method  and  Equipment  for  Checking 
Motion  Picture  Apparatus  Speeds  C. 
T.  Owlett,  49:  471-478,  Nov.  1947. 

Sound  Absorption  and  Impedance  of  Ac- 
oustical Materials,  Hale  J.  Sabine,  49: 
262-278,  Sept.  1947. 


Proposed  Standard  for  35-Mm  Flutter 
Test  Films-Report  of  the  SMPE  Com- 
mittee on  Sound,  49:  160-161,  Aug. 
1947. 

Proposed  Standard  Specifications  for  Flut- 
ter or  Wow  as  Related  to  Sound  Rec- 
ords-Report of  the  SMPE  Committee 
tee  on  Sound,  49:  147-159,  Aug.  1947. 

A  Combination  Scoring,  Re-recording, 
and  Preview  Studio,  Daniel  J.  Bloom- 
berg, W.  O.  Watson  and  Michael  Ret- 
tinger,  49:  3-26,  July  1947. 

A  High-Quality  Recording  Power  Am- 
plifier, Kurt  Singer,  48:  560-568,  June 
1947. 

A  New  Blooping  Device,  George  Lewin, 
48:  343-347,  Apr.  1947. 

The  Concentrated-Arc  Lamp  as  a  Source 
of  Modulated  Radiation,  W.  D.  Buck- 
ingham and  C.  R.  Deibert,  48:  324- 
342,  Apr.  1947. 

Report  of  the  SMPE  Committee  on  Prog- 
ress, W.  V.  Wolfe,  Chairman,  48:  304- 
316,  Apr.  1947. 

Acoustics  for  Recorded  and  Reproduced 
Sound  (Atlantic  Coast  Section  Meet- 
ing), 48:  271,  Mar.  1947. 

Corrective  Networks,  F.  L.  Hopper,  48: 
253-260,  Mar.  1947. 

The  Soundman,  George  R.  Groves,  48: 
220-230,  Mar.  1947. 

Preliminary  Report  of  Research  Council 
Photocell  Subcommittee,  Lloyd  T. 
Goldsmith,  Chairman,  48:  145-147, 
Feb.  1947. 

The  Practical  Problems  of  16-Mm  Sound, 
Allen  Jacobs,  48:  116-125,  Feb.  1947. 

A  New  Selsyn  Interlock  Selection  System, 
Daniel  J.  Bloomberg  and  W.  O.  Wat- 
son, 47:  469-473,  Dec.  1946. 

The  Newsreel-Its  Production  and  Sig- 
nificance: Newsreel  Sound,  Warren  M. 
McGrath,  47:  371-375,  Nov.  1946. 

Modernization  Desires  of  a  Major  Studio, 
Loren  L.  Ryder,  47:  225-229,  Sept. 
1946. 

A  Simplified  Recording  Transmission 
System,  F.  L.  Hopper  and  R.  C. 
Moody,  47:  132-141,  Aug.  1946. 

An  Improved  Film-Drive  Filter  Mecha- 
nism, C.  C.  Davis,  46:  454-464,  Juno 
1946. 

American  Standard  Method  of  Making 
Cross-Modulation  Tests  on  Variable- 


42 


SOUND  RECORDING,  cont'd 

Area  16-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture 
Prints,  Z22.52-1946,  46:  305-306,  Apr. 
1946. 

American  Standard  Method  of  Making 
Intermodulation  Tests  on  Variable- 
Density  16-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture 
Prints,  Z22.51-1946,  46:  303-304,  Apr. 
1946. 

American  Standard  Sound  Records  and 
Scanning  Area  of  16-Mm  Sound  Mo- 
tion Picture  Prints,  Z22.41-1946,  46: 
293,  Apr.  1946. 

American  Standard  Sound  Records  and 
Scanning  Area  of  35-Mm  Sound  Mo- 
tion Picture  Prints,  Z22.40-1946,  46: 
292,  Apr.  1946. 

American  Standard  Emulsion  and  Sound 
Record  Positions  in  Camera  for  16-Mm 
Sound  Motion  Picture  Film,  Z22.15- 
1946  (First  Edition:  Z22.15-1941), 
46:  290,  Apr.  1946. 

American  Standard  Emulsion  and  Sound 
Record  Positions  in  Projector  for  35- 
Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture  Film, 
Z22.3-1946  (First  Edition:  Z22.3- 
1941),  46:  288,  Apr.  1946. 

American  Standard  Emulsion  and  Sound 
Record  Positions  in  Camera  for  35- 
Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture  Film,  Z22.2- 
1946  (First  Edition:  Z22.2-1941),  46: 
287,  Apr.  1946. 

A  New  Recorder  for  16-Mm  Buzz  Track, 
M.  G.  Townsley,  46:  206-211,  Mar. 
1946. 

An  Integrating  Meter  for  Measurement 
of  Fluctuating  Voltages,  Harold  E. 
Haynes,  46:  128-133,  Feb.  1946. 

A  Film  Noise  Spotter,  J.  P.  Corcoran, 
46:  124-127,  Feb.  1946. 

A  Three-Band  Variable  Equalizer,  L.  D. 
Grignon,  46:  64-74,  Jan.  1946. 

Push-Pull  Frequency  Modulated  Circuit 
and  Its  Application  to  Vibratory  Sys- 
tems, Alexis  Badmaieff,  46:  37-51, 
Jan.  1946. 


Magnetic 

Motion  Picture  Studio  Use  of  Magnetic 

Recording,  L.  L.  Ryder,  55:  605-612, 

Dec.  1950. 
Magnetic  Sound  Film  Developments  in 

Great  Britain,  O.  K.  Kolb,  55:  496- 

508,  Nov.  1950. 
A  Magnetic  Record-Reproduce  Head,  M. 


Rettinger,  55:  377-390,  Oct  1950; 
Errata,  55:  646,  Dec.  1950. 

Synchronous  Recording  on  V4-In.  Mag- 
netic Tape,  W.  T.  Selsted,  55:  279- 
284,  Sept.  1950. 

Picture-Synchronous  Magnetic  Tape  Re- 
cording, D.  G.  C.  Hare  and  W.  D. 
.Fling,  54:  554-566,  May  1950. 

Sprocketless  Synchronous  Magnetic  Tape, 
R.  H.  Ranger,  54:  328-336,  Mar.  1950. 

Supplementary  Magnetic  Facilities  for 
Photographic  Sound  Systems,  G.  R. 
Crane,  J.  G.  Frayne  and  E.  W.  Temp- 
lin,  54:  315-327,  Mar.  1950. 

Magnetic  Recording  in  Motion  Picture 
Techniques,  J.  G.  Frayne  and  Halley 
Wolfe,  53:  217-235,  Sept.  1949. 

Factors  Affecting  Spurious  Printing  in 
Magnetic  Tapes,  S.  W.  Johnson,  52: 
619-628,  June  1949. 

Portable  Magnetic-Recording  System,  O. 
B.  Gunby,  52:  613-618,  June  1949. 

Magnetic  Recording  in  the  Motion  Pic- 
ture Studio,  W.  A.  Mueller  and  G.  R. 
Groves,  52:  605-612,  June  1949. 

Some  Distinctive  Properties  of  Magnetic- 
Recording  Media,  R.  Herr,  B.  F.  Mur- 
phey,  and  W.  W.  Wetzel,  52:  77-88, 
Jan.  1949. 

Optimum  High-Frequency  Bias  in  Mag- 
netic Recording,  G.  L.  Dimmick  and 
S.  W.  Johnson,  51:  489-500,  Nov. 
1948. 

35-Mm  Magnetic-Recording  System,  Earl 
Masterson,  51:  481-488,  Nov.  1948. 

Magnetic  Recording  for  the  Technician, 
Dorothy  O'Dea,  51:  468-480,  Nov. 
1948. 

Magnetic  Sound  for  8-Mm  Projection, 
Marvin  Camras,  49:  348-356,  Oct. 
1947. 

Magnetic  Recording  and  Photoemissive 
Tubes  Described  (Midwest  Section 
Meeting),  48:  392,  Apr.  1947. 

Magnetic  Recording  (Atlantic  Coast  Sec- 
tion Meeting),  48:  180,  Feb.  1947. 

Magnetic  Recording  for  Motion  Picture 
Studios,  Wesley  C.  Miller,  48:  57-62, 
Jan.  1947. 

Research  Council  Basic  Sound  Commit- 
tee: Discussion  of  Magnetic  Recording, 
48:  50-56,  Jan.  1947. 

Magnetic  Sound  Recording  on  Coated 
Paper  Tape,  H.  A.  Howell,  48:  36-49, 
Jan.  1947. 


SOUND  RECORDING,  conf d 

A  Magnetic  Sound  Recorder  of  Advanced 

Design,  R.  J.  Tinkham  and  J.  S.  Boyers, 

48:  29-35,  Jan.  1947. 
Magnetic    Sound    for    Motion    Pictures, 

Marvin  Camras,  48:  14-28,  Jan.  1947. 
Recent    Developments   in   the   Field   of 

Magnetic  Recording,  S.  J.  Begun,  48: 

1-13,  Jan.  1947. 

Photographic 

Variable-Area  Sound  Track  Requirements 
for  Reduction  Printing  Onto  Koda- 
chrome,  R.  V.  McKie,  55:  45-52,  July 
1950. 

Increased  Noise  Reduction  by  Delay  Net- 
works, J.  R.  Whitney  and  J.  W.  That- 
cher, 54:  295-302,  Mar.  1950. 

35-Mm  and  16-Mm  Portable  Sound- 
Recording  System,  E.  W.  Templin, 
53:  159-182,  Aug.  1949. 

Direct-Positive  Variable-Area  Recording 
with  the  Light  Valve,  L.  B.  Browder, 
53:  149-158,  Aug.  1949. 

Sound-on-Film  Recording  for  Television 
Broadcasting,  C.  R.  Keith,  53:  114- 
116,  Aug.  1949. 

Metallic-Salt  Track  on  Ansco  16-Mm 
Color  Film,  J.  L.  Forrest,  53:  40-49, 
July  1949. 

Direct-Positive  Variable-Density  Record- 
ing with  the  Light  Valve,  C.  R.  Keith 
and  V.  Pagliarulo,  52:  690-698,  June 
1949. 

Zero-Shift  Test  for  Determining  Optimum 
Density  in  Variable-Width  Sound  Re- 
cording, C.  H.  Evans  and  R.  C.  Lovick, 
52:  522-533,  May  1949. 

Trend  Control  in  Variable-Area  Process- 
ing, F.  P.  Herrnfeld,  52:  97-102,  Jan. 
1949. 

Wide-Track  Optics  for  Variable-Area  Re- 
corders, L.  T.  Sachtleben,  52:  89-96, 
Jan.  1949. 

Variable-Area  Light-Valve  Modulator, 
Lewis  B.  Browder,  51:  521-533,  Nov. 
1948. 

Variable-Area  Recording  with  the  Light 
Valve,  John  G.  Frayne,  51:  501-520, 
Nov.  1948. 

Light  Modulation  by  P-Type  Crystals, 
George  D.  Gotschall,  51:  13-20,  July 
1945. 


Versatile  Noise-Reduction  Amplifier,  Kurt 
Singer,  50:  562-570,  June  1948. 

Synthetic  Sound  on  Film,  Robert  E. 
Lewis,  50:  233-247,  Mar.  1948. 

A  New  Variable-Area  Recorder  Optical 
System,  J.  L.  Pettus  and  L.  T.  Sachtle- 
ben, 50:  14-36,  Jan.  1948. 

Lightweight  Recorders  for  35-  and  16- 
Mm  Film,  M.  E.  Collins,  49:  415-424, 
Nov.  1947. 

Synchronized  16-Mm  Sound  and  Picture 
for  Projection  at  16  Frames  per  Sec- 
ond, George  E.  H.  Hanson,  49:  357- 
361,  Oct.  1947. 

A  Newly  Developed  Light  Modulator  for 
Sound  Recording,  G.  L.  Dimmick,  49: 
48-57,  July  1947. 

Historical  Development  of  Sound  Films, 
E.  I.  Sponable,  48:  407-422,  May  1947. 

Historical  Development  of  Sound  Films, 
E.  I.  Sponable,  48:  275-303,  Apr. 
1947. 

A  De  Luxe  Film  Recording  Machine,  M. 
E.  Collins,  48:  148-156,  Feb.  1947. 

An  Improved  200-Mil  Push-Pull  Density 
Modulator,  J.  G.  Frayne,  T.  B.  Cun- 
ningham and  V.  Pagliarulo,  47:  494- 
518,  Dec.  1946. 

A  New  Method  of  Counteracting  Noise 
in  Sound  Film  Reproduction,  W.  K. 
Westmijze,  47:  426-440,  Nov.  1946. 

Factors  Governing  the  Frequency  Re- 
sponse of  a  Variable-Area  Film  Re- 
cording Channel,  M.  Rettinger  and 
K.  Singer,  47:  299-326,  Oct.  1946. 

A  Simplified  All-Purpose  Film  Record- 
ing Machine,  G.  R.  Crane  and  H.  A. 
Manley,  46:  465-474,  June  1946. 

Preliminary  Sound  Recording  Tests  with 
Variable-Area  Dye  Tracks,  R.  O.  Drew 
and  S.  W.  Johnson,  46:  387-404,  May 
1946. 

A  Phototube  for  Dye  Image  Sound  Track, 
Alan  M.  Glover  and  Arnold  R.  Moore, 
46:  379-386,  May  1946. 

An  Application  of  Direct-Positive  Sound 
Track  in  16-Mm  Release  Processing  by 
Duplication  Method,  G.  C.  Misener 
and  G.  Lewin,  46:  167-177,  Mar.  1946. 

A  Note  on  Chemical  Drag  Observed  with 
Variable-Density-  Sound  Tracks,  E. 
Meschter,  46:  111-114,  Feb.  1946. 

Intel-modulation   Distortion  of  Low  Fre- 


44 


SOUND  RECORDING,  cont'd 

Re-recording 

Studio  16-Mm  Re-Recording  Machine, 
G.  R.  Crane,  52:  662-668,  June  1949. 

Modern  Film  Re-Recording  Equipment, 
Wesley  C.  Miller  and  G.  R.  Crane,  51: 
399-417,  Oct.  1948. 

Four-Channel  Re-Recording  System, 
Howard  Randall  and  F.  C.  Speilberger, 
50:  502-504,  May  1948. 

Some  Special  Problems  of  Post-Synchro- 
nization Mixing,  Theodore  Lawrence, 


48:  317-323,  Apr.  1947. 

Corrective  Networks,  F.  L.  Hopper,  48i 
253-260,  Mar.  1947. 

Tone  Control  for  Recording,  C.  O.  Sly- 
field,  47:  453-456,  Dec.  1946. 

Dubbing  and  Post-Synchronization  Stu- 
dios, William  A.  Mueller,  47:  230-237, 
Sept.  1946. 

Synchronization  Technique,  W.  A.  Poz- 
ner,  47:  191-211,  Sept.  1946. 

A  Three-Band  Variable  Equalizer,  L.  D. 
Grignon,  46:  64-74,  Jan.  1946. 


SOUND  REPRODUCTION 

General 

Magnetic  Sound  Film  Developments  in 
Great  Britain,  O.  K.  Kolb,  55:  496- 
508,  Nov.  1950. 

Flutter  Measuring  Set,  F.  P.  Herrnfeld, 
55:  167-172,  Aug.  1950. 

Characteristics  of  Color  Film  Sound 
Tracks,  L.  T.  Goldsmith,  Chairman, 
Color  Committee  Report,  54:  377-378, 
Mar.  1950. 

American  Standard  Sound  Focusing  Test 
Film  for  35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Sound 
Reproducers  (Service  Type),  Z22.61- 
1949,  54:  107,  Jan.  1950. 

American  Standard  Buzz-Track  Test  Film 
for  35-Mm  Sound  Reproducers,  Z22.68- 
1949,  54:  108,  Jan.  1950. 

Lead-Sulfide  Photoconductive  Cells  in 
Sound  Reproducers,  R.  W.  Lee,  53: 
691-706,  Dec.  1949. 

35-Mm  and  16-Mm  Sound-on-Film  Re- 
producing Characteristic,  J.  K.  Hilliard, 
53:  389-395,  Oct.  1949. 

16-Mm  Film  Phonograph  for  Professional 
Use,  C.  E.  Kittle,  52:  303-308,  Mar. 
1949. 

Experiment  in  Stereophonic  Sound,  L. 
D.  Grignon,  52:  280-292,  Mar.  1949. 

Comparison  of  Lead-Sulfide  Photocon- 
ductive Cells  with  Photoemissive 
Tubes,  Norman  Anderson  and  Serge 
Pakswer,  52:  41-48,  Jan.  1949. 

An  Improved  Intel-modulation  Measuring 
System,  G.  W.  Read  and  R.  R.  Sco- 
viUe,  50:  162-173,  Feb.  1948. 

The  Sensitivity  of  Various  Phototubes  as 
a  Function  of  the  Color  Temperature 
of  the  Light  Source,  A.  CramwincVel, 
49:  523-529,  Dec.  1947. 


Method  and  Equipment  for  Checking 
Motion  Picture  Apparatus  Speeds,  C. 
T.  Owlett,  49:  471-478,  Nov.  1947. 

The  Movie-Sound-8  Projector,  Lloyd 
Thompson,  49:  463-467,  Nov.  1947. 

A  Survey,  8-Mm  Problems,  Robert  E. 
Lewis,  49:  439-452,  Nov.  1947.  ' 

The  Optimum  Width  of  Illumination  of 
the  Sound  Track  in  Sound-Reproduc- 
ing Optics,  Joseph  C.  Frommer,  49: 
361-363,  Oct.  1947. 

Synchronized  16-Mm  Sound  and  Picture 
for  Projection  at  16  Frames  per  Sec- 
ond, George  E.  H.  Hanson,  49:  357- 
361,  Oct.  1947. 

Magnetic  Sound  for  8-Mm  Projection, 
Marvin  Camras,  49:  348-356,  Oct. 
1947. 

Lead-Sulfide  Photoconductive  Cells  for 
Sound  Reproduction,  R.  J.  Cashman, 
49:  342-348,  Oct.  1947. 

Proposed  Standard  Specifications  for 
Flutter  or  Wow  as  Related  to  Sound 
Records-Report  of  the  SMPE  Com- 
mittee on  Sound,  49:  147-159,  Aug. 
1947. 

Historical  Development  of  Sound  Films. 
E.  I.  Sponable,  48:  407-422,  May  1947. 

Magnetic  Recording  and  Photoemissive 
Tubes  Described  (Midwest  Section 
Meeting),  48:  392,  Apr.  1947. 

Fader  Setting  Standard  Withdrawn,  48: 
390-391,  Apr.  1947. 

Historical  Development  of  Sound  Films, 
E.  I.  Sponable,  48:  275-303,  Apr. 
1947. 

Acoustics  for  Recorded  and  Reproduced 
Sound  (Atlantic  Coast  Section  Meet- 
ing), 48:  271.  Mar.  1947. 


45 


SOUND  REPRODUCTION,  cont'd 

A  New  Method  of  Counteracting  Noise 
in  Sound  Film  Reproduction,  W.  K. 
Westmijze,  47:  426-440,  Nov.  1946. 

Psychological  and  Technical  Considera- 
tions Employed  in  the  Bucky  Sound 
Reproduction  and  Public  Address  Sys- 
tems, Peter  A.  Bucky,  46:  75-79,  Jan. 
1946. 

An  Analysis  of  the  Comparison  of  Beam 
Power  and  Triode  Tubes  Used  in 
Power  Amplifiers  for  Driving  Loud- 
speakers, John  K.  Milliard,  46:  30-36, 
Jan.  1946. 

Loudspeakers 

Physical  Measurements  of  Loudspeaker 
Performance,  P.  S.  Veneklasen,  52: 
641-656,  June  1949. 

Theater  Loudspeaker  Design,  Perform- 
ance, and  Measurement,  J.  K.  Milliard, 
52:  629-640,  June  1949. 

Silent  Playback  and  Public-Address  Sys- 
tem, B.  H.  Denney  and  R.  J.  Carr, 
52:  313-319,  Mar.  1949. 

New  Theater  Loudspeaker  System,  H. 
F.  Hopkins  and  C.  R.  Keith,  51:  385- 
398,  Oct.  1948. 

A  Proposed  Loudness  Efficiency  Rating 
for  Loudspeakers  and  the  Determina- 
tion of  System  Power  Requirements 
for  Enclosures,  H.  F.  Hopkins  and 
N.  R.  Stryker  (Summary  from  Proc. 
I.R.E.,  p.  314,  Mar.  1948),  50:  615- 
616,  June  1948. 

Portable  and  Semiportable  Loudspeaker 
Systems  for  Reproducing  16-Mm 
Sound  on  Film,  John  K.  HiUiard,  49: 
431-438,  Nov.  1947. 

Wide-Range  Loudspeaker  Developments, 


H.  F.  Olson  and  J.  Preston,  47:  327- 

352,  Oct.  1946. 
New  Permanent  Magnet  Public  Address 

Loudspeaker,  James   B.   Lansing,  46: 

212-219,  Mar.  1946. 
Wave   Propagation    and   Outdoor   Field 

Tests  of  a  Loudspeaker  System,  F.  L. 

Hopper  and  R.  C.  Moody,  46:   115- 

123,  Feb.  1946. 

Theater 

Proposed  American  Standard  Sound 
Transmission  of  Theater  Projection 
Screens,  Z22.82,  55:  120,  July  1950. 

Theater  Reproducer  for  Double-Width 
Push-Pull  Operation,  G.  R.  Crane,  52: 
657-661,  June  1949. 

Versatile  Measuring  Instrument  for  Thea- 
ter Sound  Service,  C.  S.  Perkins  and 
E.  S.  Seeley,  50:  554-562,  June  1948. 

A  Modern  Sound-Reinforcement  System 
for  Theaters,  C.  E.  Talley  and  R.  W. 
Kautzky,  50:  149-161,  Feb.  1948. 

The  Contribution  of  Theater  Service  to 
Twenty  Years  of  Motion  Picture  Sound 
Progress,  E.  S.  Seeley,  48:  423-436, 
May  1947. 

Postwar  Test  Equipment  for  Theater 
Servicing,  Edward  Stanko  and  Paul  V. 
Smith,  47:  457-463,  Dec.  1946. 

Behavior  of  a  New  Blue-Sensitive  Photo- 
tube in  Theater  Sound  Equipment,  J. 
D.  Phyfe,  46:  405-408,  May  1946. 

Westrex  Master  Sound  Film  Reproducer, 
G.  S.  Appelgate  and  J.  C.  Davidson, 
46:  278-283,  Apr.  1946. 

Westrex  Standard  Sound  Film  Repro- 
ducer, G.  S.  Appelgate  and  J.  C.  David- 
son, 46:  272-277,  Apr.  1946. 


SPECIAL  EFFECTS  (see  also  PROJECTION— Background). 
A  Motion  Repeating  System  for  Special 

Effect  Photography,  O.  L.  Dupy,  54: 

290-294,  Mar.   1950. 
Sensitometric    Aspects     of     Background 

Process  Photography,   Herbert  Meyer, 

54:    275-289,  Mar.   1950. 
The  Mult-Efex  Titler  Device,  James  T. 

Strohm,  49:  544-546,  Dec.  1947. 
The   Simulation  of  Radar  Presentations 

for   Briefing   Purposes,   Joseph   West- 

heimer,  48:   586-590,  June  1947. 

Splicing:  see  LABORATORY  PRACTICE 


Electronic  Fire  and  Gas  Light  Effect, 
Harold  Nye,  48:  353-360,  Apr.  1947. 

Zoom  Lens  for  Motion  Picture  Cameras 
with  Single-Barrel  Linear  Movement, 
Frank  G.  Back,  47:  464-468,  Dec. 
1946. 

Naval  Training-Type  Epidiascope  for 
Universal  Projection  of  Solid  Objects, 
Jacques  Bolsey,  47:  418-425,  Nov. 
1946. 


46 


SPROCKETS  (see  also  FILM— General). 

Recommendations  for  16-Mm  and  8-Mm 

Sprocket  Design,   54:    219-228,  Feb. 

1950. 
Standards  Recommendation  for  35-Mm 

Sprocket  Holes,  53:  211,  Aug.  1949. 
Proposed    16-Mm   and    8-Mm   Sprocket 

Standards  (Discussion),  51:  437-440, 

Oct.  1948. 


American  Standard  Dimensions  for  16- 
Tooth  35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Projec- 
tor Sprockets,  Z22.35-1947  (Revision 
of  Z22.35-1930),  49:  178,  Aug.  1947. 

Proposals  for  16-Mm  and  8-Mm  Sprocket 
Standards,  J.  S.  Chandler,  D.  F.  Ly- 
man  and  L.  R.  Martin,  48:  483-520, 
June  1947. 


Standards:  see  the  two  indexes  on  pp.  71  and  73  or  the  specific  subject  heading 
STEREOSCOPY . 

Light   Control  by  Polarization   and  the      The   Waller   Flexible   Gunnery   Trainer, 
Application  of  Polarizers  to  the  Stereo-         Fred  Waller,  47:  73-87,  July  1946, 
scopic  Process,  J.  A.  Norling,  48:  129- 
144,  Feb.  1947. 


STUDIOS  (see  also  PRODUCTION) 

Space  Acoustics,  James  Y.  Dunbar,  49: 
372-388,  Oct.  1947. 

A  Combination  Scoring,  Re-recording, 
and  Preview  Studio,  Daniel  J.  Bloom- 
berg, W.  O.  Watson  and  Michael  Ret- 
tinger,  49:  3-26,  July  1947. 

Modernization  Desires  of  a  Major  Studio, 


L.  L.  Ryder,  47:  225-229,  Sept.  1946. 

A  Complete  Motion  Picture  Production 
Plant  for  Metropolitan  New  York, 
R.  B.  Austrian,  47:  12-21,  July  1946. 

Dubbing  and  Post-Synchronization  Stu- 
dios, William  A.  Mueller,  47:  230-237, 
Sept.  1946. 


TELEVISION  (see  also  LIGHTING— Studio,  and  THEATER  TELEVISION! 


General 

Motion  Pictures  and  Television,  V.  K. 
Zworykin,  55:  562-566,  Dec.  1950. 

New  Television  Camera  Tubes  and  Some 
Applications  Outside  the  Broadcasting 
Field,  V.  K.  Zworykin,  55,  227-242, 
Sept.  1950. 

Component  Arrangement  for  a  Versatile 
Television  Receiver,  F.  N.  Gillette  and 
J.  S.  Ewing,  55:  189-196,  Aug.  1950. 

Discussion— Television  Forum  (D.  E. 
Hyndman,  Moderator),  53:  124-127, 
Aug.  1949. 

Will  Film  Take  Over  the  Television 
Commercial?,  J.  A.  Moran,  53:  120- 
123,  Aug.  1949. 

Engineering  Techniques  in  Motion  Pic- 
tures and  Television,  A.  N.  Goldsmith, 
53:  109-111,  Aug.  1949. 

Effect  of  Television  on  Motion  Picture 
Attendance,  R.  B.  Austrian,  53:  12-18, 
Jan.  1949. 

Video  Distribution  Facilities  for  Tele- 
vision Transmission,  Ernst  H.  Schreiber, 
51:  574-585,  Dec.  1948. 

Historical  Sketch  of  Television's  Progress, 
L.  R.  Lankes,  51:  223-229,  Sept.  1948. 


Television    Remote    Operations,    A.    H. 

Brolly,  50,  54-63,  Jan.  1948. 
The    Showmanship    Side    of    Television, 

R.  B.  Austrian,  49:  395-404,  Nov.  1947. 
Report    of    the    SMPE    Committee    on 

Progress,  W.  V.  Wolfe,  Chairman,  48: 

304-316,  Apr.  1947. 
Operation    of    Station    WBKB,    Chicago 

(Midwest  Section  Meeting),  48:   180, 

Feb.  1947. 

Television  and  the  Motion  Picture  Thea- 
ter, Lester  B.  Isaac,  47:  482-486,  Dec. 

1946. 
The   Relation   of   Television   to    Motion 

Pictures,  Allen  B.  Du  Mont,  47:  238- 

247,  Sept.  1946. 
Technical  News,  46:   80-84,  Jan.  1946. 

Color 

Color    Cathode-Ray    Tube    With    Three 

Phosphor   Bands,    C.    S.    Szegho,   55: 

367-376,  Oct.  1950. 
Color  Television,  F.  H.  Mclntosh  and  A 

F.  Inglis,  55:  343-366,  Oct.  1950. 
Motion    Picture    Color    Photography    of 

Color  Television  Images,  W.  R.  Fraser, 

and  G.  J.  Badgley,  54:  735-744,  June 

1950. 


47 


TELEVISION,  oonfd 


Colorimetry   in    Television,    William    H. 

Cherry,  51;  613-642,  Dec.  1948. 
Color  Television  Film  Scanner,  Bernard 

Erde,  51:  351-372,  Oct.  1948. 

Film  Recording 

Television  Recording  Camera  Intermit- 
tent, John  M.  Wall,  54:  732-734,  June 
1950. 

The  Picture  Splice  as  a  Problem  of  Video 
Recording,  F.  N.  Gillette,  53:  242- 
255,  Sept.  1949. 

Sound-on-Film  Recording  for  Television 
Broadcasting,  C.  R.  Keith,  53:  114- 
116,  Aug.  1949. 

Sensitometric  Aspects  of  Television 
Monitor-Tube  Photography,  Fred  G. 
Albin,  51,  595-612,  Dec.  1948. 

Television  Recording  Camera,  J.  L. 
Boon,  W.  Feldman  and  J.  Stoiber,  51: 
117-126,  Aug.  1948. 

Television  Transcription  by  Motion  Pic- 
ture Film,  T.  T.  Goldsmith,  Jr.,  and 
Harry  Milholland,  51:  107-116,  Aug. 
1948. 

A  New  Film  for  Photographing  the  Tele- 
vision Monitor  Tube,  C.  F.  White  and 
M.  R.  Boyer,  47:  152-164,  Aug.  1946. 

Films 

Motion  Picture  Production  for  Television, 

J.  Fairbanks,  55:  567-575,  Dec.  1950. 
Specifications  for  Motion  Picture  Films 

Intended  for  Television  Transmission, 

C.  L.  Townsend,  55:    147-157,  Aug. 

1950. 
Television  Test  Film,  54:  209-218,  Feb. 

1950. 
Television-Film     Requirements,     G.     D. 

Gudebrod,  53:   117-119,  Aug.   1949. 
Motion  Picture  Laboratory  Practice  for 

Television,  A.  J.  Miller,  53:   112-113, 

Aug.  1949. 

Films  in  Television,  Television  Commit- 
tee, D.  R.  White,  chairman,  52:  363- 

383,  Apr.  1949. 
Films    for    Television,    Jerry    Fairbanks, 

51:  590-594,  Dec.  1948. 
A  Test  Reel  for  Television  Broadcast,  M. 

R.  Boyer,  49:  391-394,  Nov.  1947. 
Film  Projectors  for  Television,  Ralph  V. 

Little,  Jr.,  48:  93-110,  Feb.  1947. 
A  Unified  Approach  to  the  Performance 

of  Photographic  Film,  Television  Pick- 


up Tubes,  and  the  Human  Eye,  47: 
273-294,  Oct.  1946. 
Television   Reproduction  from   Negative 
Films,    E.    Meschter,    47:     165-181, 
Aug.  J946. 

Lighting 

Lighting  Methods  for  Television  Studios, 
H.  M.  Gurin,  55:  576-589,  Dec.  1950. 

CBS  Television  Staging  and  Lighting 
Practices,  R.  S.  O'Brien,  55:  243-264, 
Sept.  1950. 

Lighting  Distortion  in  Television,  Rich- 
ard Blount,  53:  625-634,  Dec.  1949. 

Television  Studio  Lighting,  A.  H.  Brolly, 
53:  611-624,  Dec.  1949. 

Television  Studio  Lighting,  W.  C.  Eddy, 
49:  334-341,  Oct.  1947. 

Carbon  Arcs  for  Motion  Picture  and 
Television  Studio  Lighting,  F.  T.  Bow- 
ditch,  M.  R.  Null  and  R.  J.  Zavesky, 
46:  441-453,  June  1946. 

An  Appraisal  of  Illuminants  for  Tele- 
vision Studio  Lighting,  R.  E.  Farnham, 
46:  431-440,  June  1946. 

Picture  Quality 

Perception  of  Television  Random  Noise, 
Pierre  Mertz,  54:  8-34,  Jan.  1950. 

Screens 

Characteristics    of    Motion    Picture    and 

Television  Screens,  F.  B.  Berger,  55, 

131-146,  Aug.  1950. 
The    Shape    of    the    Television    Screen, 

Rudy  Bretz,  54:  545-553,  May  1950. 

Studio  Production 

An  Improved  Video  System  for  Tele- 
vision Studios,  N.  F.  Smith,  55:  477- 
484,  Nov.  1950. 

CBS  Television  Staging  and  Lighting 
Practices,  R.  S.  O'Brien,  55:  243-264, 
Sept.  1950. 

An  Experimental  Electronic  Background 
Television  Projection  System,  W.  R. 
Johnson,  55:  60-66,  Jiily  1950. 

Standard  Television  Switching  Equip- 
ment, R.  Bretz,  54:  407-434,  Apr.  1950. 

Television  Cutting  Techniques,  Rudy 
Bretz,  54:  247-267,  Mar.  1950. 

Television  Pickup  for  Transparencies,  R. 
D.  Thompson,  53:  137-142,  Aug.  1949. 

Effect  of  Time  Element  in  Television 
Program  Operations,  Harry  R.  Lubcke, 
48:  543-547,  June  1947. 


Test  Film:  see  FILM— Test 

THEATER 

General 

Theater    Carpeting    Manuals    Available, 

54:   646-647,  May  1950. 
New    Brenkert    Projection    System    for 

Drive-In  Theaters,  C.   N.   Batsel  and 

H.    J.    Benham,    54:    483-491,    Apr. 

1950. 
The  Trend  in  Drive-In  Theaters,  C.  R. 

Underbill,  Jr.,  54:  161-170.  Feb.  1950. 
Desirable  Locations  for  Theater  Sites,  E. 

G.  Faludi,  53:  396-407,  Oct.  1949. 
The     Motion     Picture     Theater,     James 

Frank,  Jr.,  52:  9-11,  Jan.  1949. 
Display  Frames   in  the  Motion  Picture 

Theater,    Lester    Ring,    51:    101-103, 

July  1948. 
The    New    Slide-Back    Chair,    W.     A. 

Gedris,  50,  389-392,  Apr.  1948. 
Increasing   the   Effectiveness    of   Motion 

Picture    Presentation,    Ben    Schlanger, 

50:  367-373,  Apr.  1948. 
Seating  Arrangements,  Sight  Lines,  and 

Seating  Design,  Felix  W.  Alexa,  50: 

360-366,  Apr.  1948. 
The  Psychology  of  the  Theater,  Walter 

A.  Cutter,  50:  314-321,  Apr.  1948. 
Television  and  the  Motion  Picture  Thea- 
ter, Lester  B.  Isaac,  47:  482-486,  Dec. 

1946. 

Architecture     and     Design      (see     also 
ACOUSTICS) 

Behavior   of   Acoustic   Materials,   R.    K. 

Cook,  51,  192-202,  Aug.  1948. 
Quieting  and  Noise  Isolation,  Edward  J. 

Content,  51:  184-191,  Aug.  1948. 
Auditorium    Acoustics,    J.    P.    Maxfield, 

51:   169-183,  Aug.  1948. 
Theater     Engineering     Conference—Dis- 
cussion on  Physical  Construction,  50: 

350-359,  Apr.  1948. 
Foreign     Theater     Operation,     Clement 

Crystal,  50:  344-349,  Apr.  1948. 
The  Drive-In  Theater,  S.  Herbert  Taylor, 

50:  337-344,  Apr.  1948. 
Influence   of   West  Coast   Designers   on 

the  Modern  Theater,  S.  Charles  Lee, 

50:    329-336,   Apr.    1948. 
General   Theater    Construction,    John    J. 

McNamara,  50:   322-328,  Apr.   1948. 
Advancement  of  Motion  Picture  Theater 

Design,  Ben  Schlanger,  50:  303-313, 

Apr.  1948. 


Space  Acoustics,  James  Y.  Dunbar,  49: 
372-388,  Oct.  1947. 

A  Discussion  of  the  Acoustical  Proper- 
ties of  Fiberglas,  Willis  M.  Rees  and 
Robert  B.  Taylor,  46:  52-63,  Jan. 
1946. 

Lighting 

Brightness  and  Illumination  Require- 
ments, H.  L.  Logan,  51,  1-12,  July 
1948. 

Theater  Dimmer,  Daniel  M.  Rollins,  50: 
607-612,  June  1948. 

New  Techniques  in  Black  Light,  Ronald 
J.  Elliott,  50:  601-606,  June  1948. 

New  Circlarc  Fluorescent  Lamp,  Eugene 
W.  Beggs,  50:  593-600,  June  1948. 

Lighting  Ideas  Offering  New  Opportuni- 
ties in  the  Theater,  C.  M.  Cutler  and 
R.  T.  Dorsey,  50:  571-592,  June  1948. 

Dynamic  Luminous  Color  for  Film 
Presentation,  R.  GiUespie  Williams, 
F.I.E.S.  (G.B.),  50t  374-388,  Apr. 
1948. 

Maintenance  and  Operation 

Motion  Picture  Theater,  Planning  and 
Upkeep,  with  a  foreword  by  James 
Frank,  SMPE  Publication,  52:  457, 
Apr.  1949. 

Discussion  on  Ventilating  and  Air  Condi- 
tioning, 51,  94-100,  July  1948. 

Service  and  Maintenance  of  Air-Condi- 
tioning Systems,  W.  B.  Cott,  51: 
92-93,  July  1948. 

Ultraviolet  Air  Disinfection  in  the  Thea- 
ter, L.  J.  Buttolph,  51:  79-91,  July 
1948. 

Air  Purification  by  Glycol  Vapor,  J.  W. 
Spiselman,  51:  70-78,  July  1948. 

Motion  Picture  Theater  Air  Condition- 
ing, Dwight  D.  Kimball,  51:  52-69, 
July  1948. 

Theater  Engineering  Conference— Dis- 
cussion on  Floor  Coverings,  50:  447- 
457,  May  1948. 

Maintenance  of  Hard  Floor  Coverings, 
Daniel  Fraad,  Jr.,  50:  442-446,  May 
1948. 

Vacuum  Cleaning  of  Theaters,  Richard 
Webber,  50:  439-441,  May  1948. 

Carpet  Wear  Increased  with  Sponge 
Rubber,  W.  Lloyd  Jantzen,  50:  436- 
438,  May  1948. 


49 


THEATER,  cont'd 

Rubber  Floor  Coverings,  T.  S.  Savoury,  Buying  Carpet  by  the  Pound,  John  V. 

50:  433-435,  May  1948.  n  Smeallie>  «>«  ^21-425,  May  1948. 

_             ~                         j  T    M.  11  i_'          Report   or    the    Committee   on   Theater 

Carpet  Construction  and  Installation,  Engineering,  Construction,  and  Opera- 
Oliver  P.  Beckwith,  50:  426-432,  May  tion,  Henry  Anderson,  Chairman.  48: 

1948.  173-175,  Feb.  1947. 


THEATER  TELEVISION 

Improvements  in  Large-Screen  Tele- 
vision Projection,  T.  M.  C.  Lance,  55: 
509-524,  Nov.  1950. 

Characteristics  of  Motion  Picture  and 
Television  Screens,  F.  B.  Berger,  55: 
131-146,  Aug.  1950. 

The  Eidophor  Method  for  Theater  Tele- 
vision, E.  Labin,  54:  393-406,  Apr. 
1950. 

Statement  on  Theater  Television,  Theater 
Television  Committee,  D.  E.  Hynd- 
man,  Chairman,  53:  354-362,  Oct. 
1949. 

FCC  Allocation  of  Frequencies  for 
Theater  Television,  53:  351-353,  Oct. 
1949. 

Theater  Television  Today,  J.  E.  McCoy 
and  H.  P.  Warner,  53:  321-350,  Oct 
1949. 

Progress  Report— Theater  Television, 
Barton  Kreuzer,  53,  128-136,  Aug. 
1949. 

Demonstration  of  Large-Screen  Tele- 
vision at  Philadelphia,  Roy  Wilcox 
and  H.  J.  Schlafly,  52:  549-560,  May 
1949. 


Theater  Television  System,  Richard 
Hodgson,  52:  540-548,  May  1949. 

Theater  Television,  Theater  Television 
Committee,  D.  E.  Hyndman,  Chair- 
man, 52:  243-272,  Mar.  1949. 

Development  of  Theater  Television  in 
England,  A.  G.  D.  West,  51:  127-168, 
Aug.  1948. 

Discussion  on  Large-Screen  Television, 
51:  47-51,  July  1948. 

Developments  in  Large-Screen  Tele- 
vision, R.  V.  Little,  Jr.,  51:  37-46, 
July  1948. 

Optical  Problems  in  Large-Screen  Tele- 
vision, I.  G.  Maloff,  51:  30-36,  July 
1948. 

Theater  Television— A  General  Analysis, 
Alfred  N.  Goldsmith,  50:  95-122, 
Feb.  1948. 

Statement  of  SMPE  on  Revised  Fre- 
quency Allocations,  Paul  J.  Larsen, 
48:  183-202,  Mar.  1947. 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Television 
Projection  Practice,  P.  J.  Larsen, 
Chairman,  47:  118-119,  July  1946. 


Training  Film:  see  FILM — Educational,  Documentary  and  Training 


50 


Authors 


Aex,  P.  S.,  A  Photoelectric  Method  for 
Determining  Color  Balance  of  16-Mm 
Kodachrome  Duplicating  Printers,  49, 
425-430,  Nov.  1947. 

Albert,  E.,  Educational  Films  for  a 
Democratic  Tomorrow,  49,  191-194, 
Sept.  1947. 

Albin,  Fred  G.,  Sensitometric  Aspect  of 
Television  Monitor-Tube  Photography, 
51,  595-612,  Dec.  1948. 

Intel-modulation  Distortion  of  Low 

Frequencies  in  Sound  Film  Recording, 
46,  4-16,  Jan.  1946. 

Alexa,  F.  W.,  Seating  Arrangements, 
Sight  Lines,  and  Seating  Design,  50, 
360-366,  Apr.  1948. 

Alink,  R.  J.  H.,  with  Dippel,  C.  J.,  and 
Keuning,  K.  J.,  The  Metal-Diazonium 
System  for  Photographic  Reproduc- 
tions 54,  345-366,  Mar.  1950. 

Altaian,  F.  E.,  with  Clutz,  C.  W.,  and 
Streiffert,  J.  G.,  35-Mm  to  16-Mm 
Sound  Reduction  Printer,  52,  669-675, 
June  1949. 

Anderson,  D.  H.,  with  Rees,  H.  L., 
Simultaneous  Determination  of  Elon 
and  Hydroquinone  in  Photographic 
Developers,  53,  268-284,  Sept.  1949. 

Anderson,  Henry,  Report  of  the  Com- 
mittee on  Theater  Engineering,  Con- 
struction, and  Operation,  48,  173-175, 
Feb.  1947. 

Anderson,  Norman,  with  Pakswer,  Serge, 
Comparison  of  Lead-Sulfide  Photo- 
conductive  Cells  with  Photoemissive 
Tubes,  52,  41-48,  Jan.  1949. 

Anderson,  R.  A.,  with  Whelan,  W.  T., 
High-Speed  Motion  Pictures  with  Syn- 
chronized Multiflash  Lighting,  50, 
199-207,  Mar.  1948. 

Andres,  E.  A.,  Sr.,  Use  of  High-Speed 
Photography  in  the  Air  Forces,  52, 
81-89,  Supplement  (Part  II),  Mar. 
1949. 


Appelgate,  G.  S.,  with  Davidson,  J.  C., 

Westrex  Standard  Sound  Film  Repro- 
duction, 46,  272-277,  Apr.  1946;  Wes- 
trex Master  Sound  Film  Reproduc- 
tion, 46,  278-283,  Apr.  1946. 

Audiger,  L.,  with  Robertson,  R.,  Gau- 
mont-Kalee  Model  21  Projector,  51, 
269-293,  Sept.  1948. 

Austrian,  Ralph  B.,  Effect  of  Television 
on  Motion  Picture  Attendance,  52,  12- 
18,  Jan.  1949. 

The  Showmanship  Side  of  Tele- 
vision, 49,  395-404,  Nov.  1947. 

A  Complete  Motion  Picture  Produc- 
tion Plant  for  Metropolitan  New  York, 
47,  12-21,  July  1946. 

Ayling,  R.  J.,  New  Portable  High-In- 
tensity Arc  Spotlight,  53,  408-416, 
Oct.  1949. 


Babish,  R.  C.,  Radar  Scope  Photography, 
48,  454-472,  May  1947. 

Bach,  Walter,  with  Wagner,  Chris,  In- 
dustrial Sapphire  in  Motion  Picture 
Equipment,  54,  95-101,  Jan.  1950. 

Back,  Frank  G.,  Zoomar  Lens  for  35-Mm 
Film,  51,  294-297,  Sept.  1948. 

A  Simplified  Method  for  Precision 

Calibration  of  Effective  /-Stops,  49, 
122-129,  Aug.  1947. 

The  Physical   Properties   and  the 

Practical   Application   of   the   Zoomar 
Lens,  49,  57-63,  July  1947. 

Zoom    Lens    for    Motion    Picture 

Cameras  with  Single-Barrel  Linear 
Movement,  47,  464^68,  Dec.  1946. 

Nonintermittent    Motion    Picture 

Projector  with  Variable  Magnification, 
47,  248-253,  Sept.  1946. 

Badgley,  G.  J.,  with  Fraser,  W.  R.,  Mo- 
tion Picture  Color  Photography  of 
Color  Television  Images,  54,  735-744, 
June  1950. 


•    51 


BAD 


Badmaieff,  Alexis,  Push-Pull  Frequency 
Modulated  Circuit  and  Its  Applica- 
tion to  Vibratory  Systems,  46,  37-51, 
Jan.  1946. 

Baird,  K.  M.,  with  Durie,  D.  S.  L.,  Very- 
High-Speed  Drum-Type  Camera,  53, 
489-495,  Nov.  1949. 

Baker,  F.  F.,  A  New  16-Mm  Profes- 
sional Camera,  48,  157-162,  Feb.  1947. 

Barstow,  Frederick  E.,  Infrared  Photog- 
raphy with  Electric-Flash,  55,  485- 
495,  Nov.  1950. 

Bates,  J.  E.,  with  Runyan,  I.  V.,  Process- 
ing Control  Procedures  for  Ansco  Color 
Film,  53,  3-24,  July  1949. 

Batsel,  C.  N.,  with  Benham,  H.  J.,  New 
Brenkert  Projection  System  for  Drive- 
in  Theaters,  54,  483-491,  Apr.  1950. 

Baumbach,  H.  L.,  An  Improved  Method 
for  the  Determination  of  Hydroqui- 
none  and  Metol  in  Photographic  De- 
velopers, 47,  403-408,  Nov.  1946. 

Baumbach,  H.  L.,  with  Causman,  H.  E., 
Aluminum  and  Chromium  as  Gelatin 
Hardeners,  47,  22-54,  July  1946. 

Baumert,  E.,  with  Noble,  J.  V.,  The  De- 
velopment of  an  Invisible  16-Mm  Film 
Splice,  48,  231-237,  Mar.  1947. 

Beard,  Max,  Applications  of  High-Speed 
Photography,  52,  97-106,  Supplement 
(Part  II),  Mar.  1949. 

Beckwith,  O.  P.,  Carpet  Construction  and 
Installation,  50,  426-432,  May  1948. 

Beeson,  E.  J.  G.,  with  Bourne,  H.  K., 
The  Cine  Flash,  A  New  Lighting 
Equipment  for  High-Speed  Cinepho- 
tography  and  Studio  Effects,  55,  29&- 
312,  Sept.  1950. 

Beggs,  E.  W.,  Design  and  Use  of  the 
New  Circlarc  Fluorescent  Lamp  in 
Theater  Lighting,  50,  59-3-600,  June 
1948. 

Begun,  S.  J.,  Recent  Developments  in 
the  Field  of  Magnetic  Recording,  48, 
1-13,  Jan.  1947. 

Bell,  H.  H.,  with  Cronenwett,  W.  R., 
A  Survey  of  the  Application  of  Photog- 
raphy in  Naval  Research,  Testing,  and 
Development,  49,  494-505,  Dec.  1947. 

Benham,  H.  J.,  Projection  Equipment  for 
Screening  Rooms,  51,  261-268,  Sept. 
1948. 


Benham,  H.  J.,  with  Batsel,  C.  N.,  New 
Brenkert  Projection  System  for  Drive- 
in  Theaters,  54,  483-491,  Apr.  1950. 
Benham,  H.  J.,  with  Heacock,  R.  H.,  A 
New  Deluxe  35-Mm  Motion  Picture 
Projector  Mechanism,  55,  319-326, 
Sept.  1950. 

Berg,  B.,  with  Boyle,  J.  W.,  Studio  Pro- 
duction with  Two-Color  Bipack  Mo- 
tion Picture  Film,  48,  111-115,  Feb. 
1947. 

Berger,  France  B.,  Characteristics  of  Mo- 
tion Picture  and  Television  Screens, 
55,  131-146,  Aug.  1950. 
Berkley,  Carl,  with  Feldt,  Rudolf,  Cath- 
ode-Ray-Tube Applications  in  Photog- 
raphy and  Optics,  53,  64-85,  Julv 
1949. 

Berkley,  Carl,  with  Mansberg,  H.  P., 
Techniques  in  High-Speed  Cathode- 
Ray  Oscillography,  53,  549-578,  Nov. 
1949. 

Berlant,  Emmanuel,  A  System  of  Lens 
Stop  Calibration  by  Transmission,  46, 
17-25,  Jan.  1946. 

Bingham,     Ronald     H.,      Sensitometric 
Evaluation  of  Reversible  Color  Film, 
46,  368-378,  May  1946. 
Bitel,  J.  G.,  Sound  Motion  Pictures  for 
Passenger  Trains,  50,  64-67,  Jan.  1948. 
Blackburn,    Wayne,    Study    of    Sealed 
Beam  Lamps  for  Motion  Picture  Set 
Lighting,  55,  101-112,  July  1950. 
Bloomberg,  Daniel  J.,  with  Watson,  W. 
O.,  A  New  Selsyn  Interlock  Selection 
System,  47,  469-473,  Dec.  1946. 
Bloomberg,  D.  J.,  with  Watson,  W.  O., 
and    Rettinger,    M.,    A    Combination 
Scoring,    Re-recording,    and    Preview 
Studio,  49,  3-26,  July  1947. 
Blount,  Richard,  Lighting  Distortion  in 

Television,  53,  625-634,  Dec.  1949. 
Bolsey,    Jacques,    Naval    Training-Type 
Epidiascope    for    Universal    Projection 
of  Solid  Objects,  47,  418-425,  Nov. 
1946. 

Boon,  J.  L.,  with  Feldman,  W.,  and 
Stoiber,  J.,  Television  Recording  Cam- 
era, 51,  117-126,  Aug.  1948. 
Bornemann,  William,  with  McKusick, 
Wayne,  Illuminating  System  and  Light 
Control  for  16-Mm  Continuous  Optical 
Printer,  54,  480-482,  Apr.  1950. 


52 


btr 


Bourne,  H.  K.,  with  Beeson,  E.  J.  G., 

The  Cine  Flash,  A  New  Lighting 
Equipment  for  High-Speed  Cinepho- 
tography  and  Studio  Effects,  55,  299- 
312,  Sept.  1950. 

Bowden,  F.  W.,  with  Trimble,  L.  S., 
Colored  Trace  Oscillograms,  46,  231- 
236,  Mar.  1946. 

Bowditch,  F.  T.,  Engineering  Vice-Presi- 
dent,  A  Progress  Report  of  Engineering 
Committee  Work,  55,  547-548,  Nov. 
1950. 

Chairman,    Report    of    Standards 

Committee,  51,  230-241,  Sept.  1948. 

Light  Generation  by  the  High-In- 
tensity Carbon  Arc,  49,  209-217,  Sept. 
1947. 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Stand- 


ards, 48,  170-173,  Feb.  1947. 

Chairman,  Report  of  the  Commit- 
tee on  Standards,  47,  110-113,  Aug. 
1946. 

Bowditch,  F.  T.,  with  Harrington,  R.  E., 
Color  Measurement  of  Motion  Picture 
Screen  Illumination,  54,  63-73,  Jan. 
1950. 

Bowditch,  F.  T.,  with  Jones,  M.  T.,  Opti- 
mum Performance  of  High-Brightness 
Carbon  Arcs,  52,  395-406,  Apr.  1949. 

Bowditch,  F.  T.,  with  Null,  M.  R.,  and 
Zavesky,  R.  J.,  Carbon  Arcs  for  Mo- 
tion Picture  and  Television  Studio 
Lighting,  46,  441-453,  June  1946. 

Boyce,  M.  A.,  with  Hyten,  C.  W.,  In- 
dustrial Control  Applied  to  the  Pro- 
jection Room,  50,  248-253,  Mar.  1948. 

Boyer,  M.  R.,  A  Test  Reel  for  Television 
Broadcast  Stations,  49,  391-394,  Nov. 
1947. 

Boyer,  M.  R.,  with  White,  C.  F.,  A  New 
Film  for  Photographing  the  Television 
Monitor  Tube,  47,  152-164,  Aug. 
1946. 

Boyers,  J.  S.,  with  Tinkham,  R.  J.,  A 
Magnetic  Sound  Recorder  of  Advanced 
Design,  48,  29-35,  Jan.  1947. 

Boyle,  J.  W.,  with  Berg,  B.,  Studio  Pro- 
duction with  Two-Color  Bipack  Mo- 
tion Picture  Film,  48,  111-115,  Feb. 
1947. 

Bradley,  J.  G.,  Film  Vaults:  Construction 
and  Use,  53,  193-206,  Aug.  1949. 

Specifications   on   Motion   Picture 


Film  for  Permanent  Records,  48,  167- 

170,  Feb.  1947. 

A  National  Film  Library— the  Prob- 
lem of  Selection,  47,  63-72,  July  1946. 
Braun,  T.  J.,  Note  on  an  Improved  Filter 

Holder  for  Color  Printing,  53,  36-39, 

July  1949. 
Bretz,  Rudy,  The  Shape  of  the  Television 

Screen,  54,  545-553,  May  1950. 
Standard     Television     Switching 

Equipment,  54,  407^34,  Apr.  1950. 
Television  Cutting  Techniques,  54> 

247-267,  Mar.  1950. 
Brolly,  A.  H.,  Television  Studio  Lighting, 

53,  611-624,  Dec.  1949. 

Television  Remote  Operations,  50, 

54-63,  Jan.  1948. 

Browder,  Lewis  B.,  Direct-Positive  Vari- 
able-Area Recording  with  the  Light 
Valve,  53,  149-158,  Aug.  1949. 

Variable-Area  Light- Valve  Modu- 
lator, 51,  521-533,  Nov.  1948. 

Brown,  F.  M.,  with  Tuttle,  C.  M.,  High- 
Speed  Processing  of  35-Mm  Pictures, 

54,  149-160,  Feb.  1950. 
Brubaker,  J.  D.,  with  Holinger,  P.  EL, 

Kodachrome  Motion  Pictures  of  the 
Human  Air  and  Food  Passages,  49, 
248-261,  Sept.  1947. 

Brunner,  A.  H.,  Jr.,  with  Means,  P.  B., 
Jr.,  and  Zappert,  R.  H.,  Analysis  of 
Developers  and  Bleach  for  Ansco  Color 
Film,  53  25-35,  July  1949. 

Buckingham,  W.  D.,  The  Open-Air  Con- 
centrated-Arc Lamp,  54,  567-584, 
May  1950. 

Buckingham,  W.  D.,  with  Deibert,  C. 
R.,  The  Concentrated-Arc  Lamp  as  a 
Source  of  Modulated  Radiation,  48, 
324-342,  Apr.  1947. 

Characteristics  and  Applications  of 

Concentrated-Arc  Lamps,  47,  376-399, 
Nov.  1946. 

Bucky,  Peter  A.,  Psychological  and  Tech- 
nical Considerations  Employed  in  the 
Bucky  Sound  Reproduction  and  Public 
Address  Systems,  46,  75-79,  Jan.  1946. 

Bushong,  R.  M.,  with  Lozier,  W.  W., 
New  13.6-Mm  Hitex  Super  High-In- 
tensity Carbon,  54,  725-731,  June 
1950. 

Buttolph,  L.  J.,  Ultraviolet  Air  Disinfec- 
tion in  the  Theater,  51,  79-91,  July 
1948. 


53 


CAM 


Camras,  M.,  Magnetic  Sound  for  8-Mm 
Projection,  49,  348-356,  Oct.  1947. 

— -  Magnetic  Sound  for  Motion  Pic- 
tures, 48,  14-28,  Jan.  1947. 

Capstaff,  J.  G.,  An  Experimental  35- 
Mm  Multilayer  Stripping  Negative 
Film,  54,  445-453,  Apr.  1950. 

Carlson,  F.  E.,  Report  of  SMPE  Stand- 
ards Committee,  54,  102-105,  Jan. 
1950. 

New  Developments  in  Mercury 

Lamps  for  Studio  Lighting,  50,  122- 
138,  Feb.  1948. 

Flashtubes— A  Potential  Illuminant 

for  Motion  Picture  Photography,  48, 
395-406,  May  1947. 

Carlson,  R.  S.,  with  Edgerton,  H.  E., 
The  Stroboscope  as  a  Light  Source 
for  Motion  Pictures,  55,  88-100,  July 
1950. 

Carr,  R.  J.,  with  Denney,  B.  H.,  Silent 
Playback  and  Public-Address  System, 
52,  313-319,  Mar.  1949. 

A  Microphone  Tilting  Device,  49, 

530-536,  Dec.   1947. 

Carver,  E.  K.,  Citation  on  the  Work  of 
Ralph  H.  Talbot,  48,  65-66,  Jan.  1947. 

Case,  P.  N.,  Some  Engineering  Aspects 
of  Amateur  Projection  Equipment  for 
the  Mass  Market,  49,  139-146,  Aug. 
1947. 

Cashman,  R.  J.,  Lead-Sulfide  Photocon- 
ductive  Cells  for  Sound  Reproduction, 
49,  342-347,  Oct.  1947. 

Cellier,  F.  S.,  Blueprinting  the  Classroom 
Film,  48,  243-252,  Mar.  1947. 

Chandler,  J.  S.  with  Lyman,  D.  F.,  and 
Martin,  L.  R.,  Proposed  16-Mm  and  8- 
Mm  Sprocket  Standards  (Discussion), 
51,  437-440,  Oct.  1948. 

Proposals  for  16-Mm  and  8-Mm 

Sprocket  Standards,  48,  483-520,  June 
1947. 

Cherry,  William  H.,  Colorimetry  in  Tele- 
vision, 51,  613-642,  Dec.  1948. 

Clasby,  F.  X.,  with  Koch,  R.  A.,  War- 
time Naval  Photography  of  the  Elec- 
tronic Image,  50,  189-198,  Mar.  1948. 

Cleveland,  H.  W.,  A  Method  of  Measur- 
ing Electrification  of  Motion  Picture 
Film  Applied  to  Cleaning  Operations, 
55,  37-44,  July  1950. 

Clutz,  C.  W.,  with  Altman,  F.  E.,  and 


Streiffert,  J.  G.,  35-Mm  to  16-Mm 
Sound  Reduction  Printer,  52,  669-675, 
June  1949. 

Cobb,  H.  M.,  Motion  Pictures  in  the 
Guided-Missile  Program,  53,  431-439, 
Nov.  1949. 

Coile,  R.  C.,  Parabolic  Sound  Concentra- 
tors, 51,  298-311,  Sept.  1948. 

Coles,  C.  H.,  with  Thomas,  P.  M.,  Spe- 
cialized Photography  Applied  to  Engi- 
neering in  the  Army  Air  Forces,  46, 
220-230,  Mar.  1946. 

Collins,  M.  E.,  Lightweight  Recorders 
for  35-  and  16-Mm  Film,  49,  415-424, 
Nov.  1947. 

A  De  Luxe  Film  Recording  Ma- 
chine, 48,  148-156,  Feb.  1947. 

Conger,  R.  R.,  U.  S.  Naval  Underwater 
Cinematography  Techniques,  55,  627- 
634,  Dec.  1950. 

Conklin,  O.  E.,  Two  Microscopes  for 
Measuring  the  Dimensions  of  35-Mm 
Cine  Film,  49,  537-543,  Dec.  1947. 

Content,  E.  J.,  Quieting  and  Noise  Iso- 
lation, 51,  184-191,  Aug.  1948. 

Cook,  A.  A.,  Lenses  for  High-Speed  Mo- 
tion Picture  Cameras,  52,  110-115, 
Supplement  (Part  II),  Mar.  1949. 

Cook,  R.  K.,  Behavior  of  Acoustic  Mate- 
rials, 51,  192-202,  Aug.  1948. 

Coote,  Jack  H.,  New  Three-Color  Camera, 
50,  543-553,  June  1948. 

Corcoran,  J.  P.,  A  Film  Noise  Spotter, 
46,  124-127,  Feb.  1946. 

Cott,  W.  B.,  Service  and  Maintenance  of 
Air-Conditioning  Systems,  51,  92-93, 
July  1948. 

Coutant,  A.,  with  Mathot,  J.,  A  Reflex 
35-Mm  Magazine  Motion  Picture 
Camera,  55,  173-179,  Aug.  1950. 

Cramwinckel,  A.,  The  Sensitivity  of  Vari- 
ous Phototubes  as  a  Function  of  the 
Color  Temperature  of  the  Light  Source, 
49,  523-529,  Dec.  1947. 

Crandell,  F.  F.,  with  Freund,  K.  and 
Moen,  L.,  Effects  of  Incorrect  Color 
Temperature  on  Motion  Picture  Pro- 
duction, 55,  67-87,  July  1950. 

Crane,  G.  R.,  Theater  Reproducer  for 
Double- Width  Push-Pull  Operation,  52, 
657-661,  June  1949. 

Studio  16-Mm  Re-Recording  Ma- 
chine, 52,  662-668,  June  1949. 


54 


DIP 


Crane,  G.  R.,  with  Frayne,  J.  G.,  and 
Templin,  E.  W.,  Supplementary  Mag- 
netic Facilities  for  Photographic  Sound 
Systems,  54,  315-327,  Mar.  1950. 

Crane,  G.  R.,  with  Manley,  H.  A.,  A 
Simplified  Ail-Purpose  Film  Recording 
Machine,  46,  465-474,  June  1946. 

Crane,  G.  R.,  with  Miller,  Wesley  C., 
Modern  Film  Re-recording  Equipment, 
51,  399-417,  Oct.  1948. 

Cronenwett,  W.  R.,  with  Bell,  H.  H.,  A 
Survey  of  the  Application  of  Photog- 
raphy in  Naval  Research,  Testing,  and 
Developing,  49,  494-505,  Dec.  1947. 

Crot,  Andr6,  Research  Council  Small 
Camera  Crane,  52,  273-279,  Mar.  1949. 

Crystal,  Clement,  Foreign  Theater  Opera- 
tion, 50,  344-349,  Apr.  1948. 

Cummings,  J.  W.,  Chairman,  SMPTE 
Preservation  of  Film  Committee,  Sum- 
mary of  "The  Surveillance  of  Cinemat- 
ograph Record  Film  During  Storage," 
by  G.  L.  Hutchinson,  L.  Ellis,  and 
S.  A.  Ashmore  (British  Gov't.  Chem. 
Res.  and  Development  Establishment), 
54,  381-383,  Mar.  1950. 

Cummings,  J.  W.,  with  Hutton,  A.  C., 
and  Silfin,  Howard,  Spontaneous  Igni- 
tion of  Decomposing  Cellulose  Nitrate 
Film,  54,  268-274,  Mar.  1950. 

Cunningham,  R.  J.,  Motion  Pictures  on 
Operation  Crossroads,  48,  554-559, 
June  1947. 

Cunningham,  T.  B.,  with  Frayne,  J.  G., 
and  Pagliarulo,  V.,  An  Improved  200- 
Mil  Push-Pull  Density  Modulator,  47, 
494-518,  Dec.  1946. 

Cutler,  C.  S.,  with  Dorsey,  R.  T.,  Light- 
ing Ideas  Offering  New  Opportunities 
in  the  Theater,  50,  571-592,  June 
1948. 

Cutter,  W.  A.,  The  Psychology  of  the 
Theater,  50,  314-321,  Apr.  1948. 


Daily,  C.  R.,  A  Lens  Calibrating  System, 
46,  343-356,  May  1946. 

Daily,  C.  R.,  with  La  Grande,  Frank, 
and  Denney,  B.  H.,  16-Mm  Release 
Printing  Using  35-  and  32-Mm  Film, 
52,  211-222,  Feb.  1949. 

Davidson,  J.  C.,  with  Appelgate,  G.  S., 
Westrex  Standard  Sound  Film  Repro- 
duction, 46,  272-277,  Apr.  1946;  Wes- 


trex Master  Sound  Film  Reproduction, 
46,  278-283,  Apr.  1946. 

Davis,  C.  C.,  Synchronous  Disk  Recorder 
Drive,  52,  427-433,  Apr.  1949. 

An  Improved  Film-Drive  Filter 

Mechanism,  46,  454-464,  June  1946. 

Davis,  Faurest,  A  Survey  of  Phototem- 
plate  Methods,  46,  134-156,  Feb.  1946. 

Deibert,  C.  R.,  with  Buckingham,  W.  D., 
The  Concentrated-Arc  Lamp  as  a 
Source  of  Modulated  Radiation,  48, 
324-342,  Apr.  1947. 

Characteristics  and  Applications  of 

Concentrated-Arc  Lamps,  47,  376-399, 
Nov.  1946. 

Denney,  B.  H.,  Cathode-Ray-Oscillograph 
Images  of  Noise-Reduction  Envelopes, 
50,  37-49,  Jan.  1948. 

Denney,  B.  H.,  with  Carr,  R.  J.,  Silent 
Playback  and  Public-Address  System, 
52,  313-319,  Mar.  1949. 

A  Microphone  Tilting  Device,  49, 

530-536,  Dec.  1947. 

Denney,  B.  H.,  with  La  Grande,  Frank, 
and  Daily,  C.  R.,  16-Mm  Release  Print- 
ing Using  35-  and  32-Mm  Film,  52, 
211-222,  Feb.  1949. 

Denney,  B.  H.,  with  Tallian,  George, 
Automatic  Tempo  Indicator,  52,  571- 
577,  May  1949. 

Depue,  O.  B.,  My  First  Fifty  Years  in 
Motion  Pictures,  49,  481-493,  Dec. 
1947. 

Dibble,  F.  B.,  with  Lorance,  G.  T.,  and 
Reed,  H.  J.,  A  Sturdy,  High-Quality 
16-Mm  Projector,  54,  171-182,  Feb. 
1950. 

Dickson,  D.  C.,  with  Slack,  C.  M.,  Ehrke, 
L.  F.,  and  Zavales,  C.  T.,  New  De- 
velopments in  X-Ray  Motion  Pictures, 
52,  61-70,  Supplement  (Part  II),  Mar. 
1949. 

Dimmick,  G.  L.,  A  Newly  Developed 
Light  Modulator  for  Sound  Recording, 
49,  48-56,  July  1947. 

Dimmick,  G.  L.,  with  Johnson,  S.  W., 
Optimum  High-Frequency  Bias  in 
Magnetic  Recording,  51,  489-500,  Nov. 
1948. 

Dippel,  C.  J.,  with  Alink,  R.  J.  H.,  and 
Keuning,  K.  J.,  The  Metal-Diazonium 
System  for  Photographic  Reproduc- 
tions, 54,  345-366,  Mar.  1950. 


55 


DOH 


Doherty,  Dan,  Prcxluction  and  Signifi- 
cance of  Newsreels— Editing  the  News- 
reel,  47,  357-360,  Nov.  1946. 

Donner,  Vyvyan,  Production  and  Signifi- 
cance of  Newsreels— Women's  Fash- 
ions, 47,  364-365,  Nov.  1946. 

Dorsey,  R.  T.,  with  Cutler,  C.  M.,  Light- 
ing Ideas  Offering  New  Opportunities 
in  the  Theater,  50,  571-592,  June  1948. 

Drew,  R.  O.,  with  Johnson,  S.  W.,  Pre- 
liminary Sound  Recording  Tests  with 
Variable-Area  Dye  Tracks,  46,  387- 
404,  May  1946. 

Duerr,  Herman  H.,  Chairman,  Color 
Committee  Report,  55,  113-116,  July 
1950. 

Duerr,  Herman  H.,  with  Harsh,  H.  C., 
Ansco  Color  for  Professional  Motion 
Pictures,  46,  357-367,  May  1946. 

Du  Mont,  Allen  B.,  The  Relation  of 
Television  to  Motion  Pictures,  47,  238- 
248,  Sept.  1946. 

Dunbar,  J.  Y.,  Space  Acoustics,  49,  372- 
388,  Oct.  1947. 

Dunn,  L.,  with  Mosser,  A.,  35-Mm  Ansco 
Color  Theater  Prints  from  16-Mm 
Kodachrome,  55,  635-638,  Dec.  1950. 

Dupy,  O.  L.,  A  Motion  Repeating  System 
for  Special  Effect  Photography,  54, 
290-294,  Mar.  1950. 

Durie,  D.  S.  L.,  with  Baird,  K.  M.,  Very- 
High-Speed  Drum-Type  Camera,  53, 
489-495,  Nov.  1949. 

Eddy,  W.  C.,  Television  Studio  Lighting, 
49,  334-341,  Oct.  1947. 

Edgerton,  H.  E.,  Electrical-Flash  Photog- 
raphy, 52,  8-23,  Supplement  (Part  II), 
Mar.  1949. 

Edgerton,  H.  E.,  with  Carlson,  R.  S., 
The  Stroboscope  as  a  Light  Source  for 
Motion  Pictures,  55,  88-100,  July  1950. 

Effinger,  Carl  M.,  The  Filing  and  Cata- 
loguing of  Motion  Picture  Film,  46, 
103-110,  Feb.  1946. 

Ehrke,  L.  F.,  with  Slack,  C.  M.,  Zavales, 
C.  T.,  and  Dickson,  D.  C.,  New  De- 
velopments in  X-Ray  Motion  Pictures, 
52,  61-70,  Supplement  (Part  II),  Mar. 
1949. 

Elderldn,  J.  K.,  New  Projection  Lamp 
and  Carbon-Feed  Mechanism,  54,  87- 
94,  Jan.  1950. 


Elenbaas,  W.,  with  van  Heuven,  E.  W., 

Water-Cooled  High-Pressure  Mercury- 
Discharge  Lamp  for  Direct-Current 
Operation,  53,  594-597,  Nov.  1949. 

Elliott,  R.  J.,  New  Techniques  in  Black 
Light,  50,  601-606,  June  1948. 

Elmer,  C.  H.,  Photography  in  the  Rocket- 
Test  Program,  54,  140-148,  Feb.  1950. 

Erde,  Bernard,  Color-Television  Fihi 
Scanner,  51,  351-372,  Oct.  1948. 

Evans,  C.  H.,  with  Lovick,  R.  C.,  Zero- 
Shift  Test  for  Determining  Optimum 
Density  in  Variable-Width  Sound  Re- 
cording, 52,  522-533,  May  1949. 

Ewing,  J.  S.,  with  Gillette,  F.  N.,  Com- 
ponent Arrangement  for  a  Versatile 
Television  Receiver,  55,  189-196,  Aug. 
1950. 

Eyles,  E.  D.,  with  Jones,  G.  A.,  Recent 
British  Equipment  and  Technique  for 
High-Speed  Cinematography,  53,  502- 
514,  Nov.  1949. 

Fairbanks,  Jerry,  Motion  Picture  Produc- 
tion for  Television,  55,  567-575,  Dec. 
1950. 

Films  for  Television,  51,  590-594, 

Dec.  1948. 

Faludi,  E.  G.,  Desirable  Locations  for 
Theater  Sites,  53,  39&-407,  Oct.  1949. 

Farnham,  R.  E.,  Lamps  for  High-Speed 
Photography,  52,  35—41,  Supplement 
(Part  II),  Mar.  1949. 

An  Appraisal  of  Illuminants  for 

Television  Studio  Lighting,  46,  431- 
440,  June  1946. 

Federal  Communications  Commission, 
Allocation  of  Frequencies  for  Theater 
Television,  53,  351-353,  Oct.  1949. 

Feldman,  W.,  with  Boon,  J.  L.,  and 
Stoiber,  J.,  Television  Recording 
Camera,  51,  117-126,  Aug.  1948. 

Feldt,  Rudolf,  with  Berkley,  Carl,  Cath- 
ode-Ray-Tube Applications  in  Photog- 
raphy and  Optics,  53,  64-85,  July 
1949. 

Finkelnburg,  Wolfgang,  Effect  of  Carbon 
Cooling  on  High-Current  Arcs,  52,  407- 
416,  April  1949. 

Fling,  W.  D.,  with  Hare,  D.  G.  C.,  Pic- 
ture-Synchronous Magnetic  Tape  Re- 
cording, 54,  554-566,  May  1950. 


56 


GOL 


Fordyce,  Charles  R.,  Improved  Safety 
Motion  Picture  Film  Support,  51,  331- 
350,  Oct.  1948. 

Forrest,  J.  L.,  Metallic-Salt  Track  on 
Ansco  16-Mm  Color  Film,  53,  40-49, 
July  1949. 

Foss,  C.  E.,  Color-Order  Systems,  52, 
184-196,  Feb.  1949. 

Fraad,  Daniel,  Jr.,  Maintenance  of  Hard 
Floor  Coverings,  50,  442-446,  May 
1948. 

Francisco,  L.  M.,  Psychology  of  the 
Sound  Film,  49,  195-202,  Sept.  1947. 

Frank,  James,  Jr.,  The  Motion  Picture 
Theater,  52,  9-11,  Jan.  1949. 

Fraser,  W.  R.,  Navy  Electronic  Shutter 
Analyzer,  53,  256-267,  Sept.  1949. 

Fraser,  W.  R.,  with  Badgley,  G.  J., 
Motion  Picture  Color  Photography  of 
Color  Television  Images,  54,  735-744, 
June  1950. 

Frayne,  John  G.,  Electrical  Printing,  55, 
590-604,  Dec.  1950. 

Variable-Area  Recording  with  the 

Light  Valve,  51,  501-520,  Nov.  1948. 

Chairman,  Report  of  the  Commit- 
tee on  Motion  Picture  Instruction,  47, 
95-106,  Aug.  1946. 

Frayne,  John  G.,  with  Crane,  G.  R.,  and 
Templin,  E.  W.,  Supplementary  Mag- 
netic Facilities  for  Photographic  Sound 
Systems,  54,  315-327,  Mar.  1950. 

Frayne,  John  G.,  with  Cunningham,  T. 
B.,  and  Pagliarulo,  V.,  An  Improved 
200-Mil  Push-Pull  Density  Modulator, 
47,  494-518,  Dec.  1946. 

Frayne,  John  G.,  with  Wolfe,  Halley, 
Magnetic  Recording  in  Motion  Pic- 
ture Techniques,  53,  217-235,  Sept. 
1949. 

Freund,  K.,  with  Crandell,  F.  F.,  and 
Moen,  L.,  Effects  of  Incorrect  Color 
Temperature  on  Motion  Picture  Pro- 
duction, 55,  67-87,  July  1950. 

Friedman,  J.  S.,  with  Harsh,  H.  C.,  New 
One-Strip  Color-Separation  Film  in 
Motion  Picture  Production,  50,  8-13, 
Jan.  1948. 

Fritts,  Edwin  C.,  A  Heavy-Duty  16-Mm 
Sound  Projector,  55,  425-438,  Oct. 
1950. 

Frommer,  J.  C.,  The  Optimum  Width  of 
Illumination  of  the  Sound  Track  in 


Sound-Reproducing  Optics,  49,  361- 
363,  Oct.  1947. 

Froula,  H.  C.,  with  Lewis,  R.  E.,  Use 
of  G-3  Film-Processing  Tank,  50,  474- 
488,  May  1948. 

Fye,  Paul  M.,  The  High-Speed  Photog- 
raphy of  Underwater  Explosions,  55, 
414-424,  Oct.  1950. 


Gardner,  I.  C.,  Compensation  of  the 
Aperture  Ratio  Markings  of  a  Photo* 
graphic  Lens  for  Absorption,  Reflec- 
tion, and  Vignetting  Losses,  49,  96- 
110,  Aug.  1947. 

Gausman,  H.  E.,  with  Baumbach,  H.  L., 
Aluminum  and  Chromium  as  Gelatin 
Hardeners,  47,  22-54,  July  1946. 

Gedris,  W.  A.,  The  New  Slide-Back 
Chair,  50,  389-392,  Apr.  1948. 

Germeshausen,  K.  J.,  New  High-Speed 
Stroboscope  for  High-Speed  Motion 
Pictures,  52,  24-34,  Supplement  (Part 
II),  Mar.  1949. 

Gertiser,  C.  J.,  with  Zavesky,  R.  J.,  and 
Lozier,  W.  W.,  Screen  Illumination 
with  Carbon  Arc  Motion  Picture  Pro- 
jection Systems,  48,  73-81,  Jan.  1947. 

Gieseler,  L.  P.,  The  Pressurized  Ballistics 
Range  at  the  Naval  Ordnance  Labora- 
tory, 55,  53-59,  July  1950. 

Gillette,  F.  N.,  The  Picture  Splice  as  a 
Problem  of  Video  Recording,  53,  242- 
255,  Sept.  1949. 

Gillette,  F.  N.,  with  Ewing,  J.  S.,  Com- 
ponent Arrangement  for  a  Versatile 
Television  Receiver,  55,  189-196,  Aug. 
1950. 

Glover,  Alan  M.,  with  Moore,  Arnold  R., 
Phototube  for  Dye  Image  Sound  Track, 
46,  379-386,  May  1946. 

Goldsmith,  A.  N.,  Engineering  Tech- 
niques in  Motion  Pictures  and  Tele- 
vision, 53,  109-111,  Aug.  1949. 

Theater  Television— A  General 

Analysis,  50,  95-121,  Feb.  1948. 

Goldsmith,  L.  T.,  Chairman,  Character- 
istics of  Color  Film  Sound  Tracks,  54, 
377  (table),  Mar.  1950. 

Preliminary  Report  of  Research 

Council  Photocell  Subcommittee,  48, 
145-147,  Feb.  X947. 


57 


GOL 


Goldsmith,  T.  T.,  Jr.,  with  Milholland, 
Harry,  Television  Transcription  by  Mo- 
tion Picture  Film,  51,  107-116,  Aug. 
1948. 

Gopal,  Krishna,  New  Laboratory  for 
Processing  Monopack  Color  Film,  55, 
639-646,  Dec.  1950. 

Gordon,  Jack,  Production  and  Signifi- 
cance of  Newsreels— The  Field  Unit, 
47,  367-368,  Nov.  1946. 

Gotschall,  G.  D.,  Light  Modulation  by 
P-Type  Crystals,  51,  13-20,  July  1948. 

Green,  E.  E.,  with  Obst,  T.  J.,  Bowen 
Ribbon-Frame  Camera,  53,  515-523, 
Nov.  1949. 

Gregor,  H.  P.,  with  Sherman,  N.  N., 
Demineralization  of  Photographic  Wash 
Water  by  Ion  Exchange,  53,  183-191, 
Aug.  1949. 

Gretener,  Edgar,  Physical  Principles,  De- 
sign and  Performance  of  the  Ventarc 
High-Intensity  Projection  Lamps,  55, 
391-413,  Oct.  1950. 

Griffin,  Herbert,  A  New  Heavy-Duty 
Professional  Theater  Projector,  55, 
313-318,  Sept.  1950. 

Grignon,  Lorin  D.,  Experiment  in  Stereo- 
phonic Sound,  52,  280-292,  Mar.  1949. 

Flicker  in  Motion  Pictures:  Further 

Studies,  51,  555-573,  Dec.  1948;  Er- 
rata, 52:  539,  May  1949. 

A  Three-Band  Variable  Equalizer, 

46,  64-74,  Jan.  1946. 

Grimwood,  W.  K.,  Volume  Compressors 
for  Sound  Recording,  52,  49-76,  Jan. 
1949. 

Groves,  G.  R.,  The  Soundman,  48,  220- 
230,  Mar.  1947. 

Groves,  G.  R.,  with  Mueller,  W.  A., 
Magnetic  Recording  in  the  Motion 
Picture  Studio,  52,  605-612,  June  1949. 

Gudebrod,  G.  D.,  Television-Film  Re- 
quirements, 53,  117-119,  Aug.  1949. 

Guilford,  J.  P.,  System  in  Color  Pref- 
erences, 52,  197-210,  Feb.  1949. 

Gunby,  O.  B.,  Portable  Magnetic-Record- 
ing System,  52,  613-618,  June  1949. 

Gundelfinger,  A.  M.,  Cinecolor  Three- 
Color  Process,  54,  74-86,  Jan.  1950. 

Gurin,  H.  M.,  Lighting  Methods  for  Tele- 
vision Studios.  55,  576-589,  Dec.  1950. 


Halm,  C.  A.,  High-Intensity  Projection 
Arc  Lamp,  50,  489-501,  May  1948. 

Hall,  J.  S.,  with  Mayer,  A.  and  Maslach, 
G.,  A  16-Mm  Rapid  Film  Processor, 
55,  27-36,  July  1950. 

Handley,  C.  W.,  Chairman,  Progress 
Committee  Report,  54,  525-543,  May 
1950. 

Report  of  Studio-Lighting  Com- 
mittee (1947),  51,  431-436,  Oct.  1948. 

Chairman,  Report  of  the  Commit- 
tee on  Studio  Lighting,  47,  113-118, 
Aug.  1946. 

Hankins,  M.  A.,  Chairman,  Report  of  the 
Studio  Lighting  Committee,  51,  656- 
666,  Dec.  1948. 

Recent  Developments  of  Super- 
High-Intensity  Carbon-Arc  Lamps,  49, 
37-47,  July  1947. 

Hankins,  M.  A.,  with  Mole,  P.,  Design- 
ing Engine-Generator  Equipment  for 
Motion  Picture  Locations,  55,  197-212, 
Aug.  1950. 

Hanson,  G.  E.  H.,  Synchronized  16-Mm 
Sound  and  Picture  for  Projection  at  16 
Frames  per  Second,  49,  357-360,  Oct 
1947. 

Hanson,  W.  T.,  Jr.,  with  Richey,  F.  A., 
Three-Color  Subtractive  Photography, 
52,  119-132,  Feb.  1949. 

Hardy,  H.  C.,  Acoustical  Factors  in  the 
Design  of  Motion  Picture  Equipment, 
50,  139-148,  Feb.  1948. 

Hare,  D.  G.  C.,  with  Fling,  W.  D.,  Pic- 
ture-Synchronous Magnetic  Tape  Re- 
cording, 54,  554-566,  May  1950. 

Harrington,  R.  E.,  with  Bowditch,  F.  T., 
Color  Measurement  of  Motion  Picture 
Screen  Illumination,  54,  63-73,  Jan. 
1950. 

Harsh,  H.  C.,  with  Duerr,  H.  H.,  Ansco 
Color  for  Professional  Motion  Pictures, 
46,  357-367,  May  1946. 

Harsh,  H.  C.,  with  Friedman,  J.  S.,  New 
One-Strip  Color-Separation  Film  in 
Motion  Picture  Production,  50,  8-13, 
Jan.  1948. 

Harsh,  H.  C.,  with  Schadlich,  K.,  Labo- 
ratory for  Development  Work  on  Color 
Motion  Pictures,  53,  50-57,  July  1949. 

Hatch,  A.  J.,  Jr.,  Portable  Device  for 
Measuring  Radiant  Energy  at  the  Pro- 
jector Aperture,  53,  363-367,  Oct 
1949. 


HYN 


Hayek,  A.,  Design  Factors  in  35-Mm 
Intermittent  Mechanisms,  49,  405^114, 
Nov.  1947. 

Hayes,  James  D.,  Standardization  and 
the  Antitrust  Laws,  46,  516-525,  June 
1946. 

Hayes,  J.  D.,  with  Pestrecov,  K.,  Animar 
Series  of  Photographic  Lenses,  54, 
183-198,  Feb.  1950. 

Haynes,  Harold  E.,  An  Integrating  Meter 
for  Measurement  of  Fluctuating  Volt- 
ages, 46,  128-133,  Feb.  1946. 

Heacock,  R.  H.,  with  Benham,  H.  J.,  A 
New  Deluxe  35-Mm  Motion  Picture 
Projection  Mechanism,  55,  319-326, 
Sept.  1950. 

Herr,  R.,  with  Murphey,  B.  F.,  and 
Wetzel,  W.  W.,  Some  Distinctive  Prop- 
erties of  Magnetic-Recording  Media, 
52,  77-88,  Jan.  1949. 

Herrnfeld,  Frank  P.,  Flutter  Measuring 
Set,  55,  167-172,  Aug.  1950. 

Printing  Equipment  for  Ansco  Color 

Film,  54,  454-463,  Apr.  1950. 

Trend  Control  in  Variable-Area 

Processing,  52,  97-102,  Jan.  1949. 

Hicks,  O.  H.,  American  Films  Abroad, 
49,  297-305,  Oct.  1947. 

Higgons,  E.  T.,  Exposure  Meter  for  High- 
Speed  Photography,  53,  545-548,  Nov. 
1949. 

Hilliard,  John  K.,  Miniature  Condenser 
Microphone,  54,  303-314,  Mar.  1950. 

35-Mm  and  16-Mm  Sound-on-Film 

Reproducing  Characteristic,  53,  389- 
395,  Oct.  1949. 

- —  Theater  Loudspeaker  Design,  Per- 
formance, and  Measurement,  52,  629- 
640,  June  1949. 

Portable  and  Semiportable  Loud- 
speaker Systems  for  Reproducing  16- 
Mm  Sound  on  Film,  49,  431-438,  Nov. 
1947. 

An  Analysis  of  the  Comparison  of 

Beam  Power  and  Triode  Tubes  Used 
in  Power  Amplifiers  for  Driving  Loud- 
speakers, 46,  30-36,  Jan.  1946. 

Hinz,  E.  R.,  with  Main,  C.  A.,  and  Muhl, 
Elinor  P.,  High-Speed  Photography  of 
Reflection-Lighted  Objects  in  Trans- 
onic Wind  Tunnel  Testing,  55,  613- 
626,  Dec.  1950. 


Hittle,  C.  E.,  16-Mm  Film  Phonograph 
for  Professional  Use,  52,  303-308,  Mar. 
1949. 

Hodgson,  Richard,  Theater  Television 
System,  52,  540-548,  May  1949. 

Holcomb,  A.  L.,  Precision  Speed  Control, 

52,  561-570,  May  1949. 

Holinger,  P.  H.,  and  Brubaker,  J.  D., 
Kodachrome  Motion  Pictures  of  the 
Human  Air  and  Food  Passages,  49, 
248-261,  Sept.  1947. 

Holm,  W.  R.,  with  Kaylor,  J.  W.,  1000- 
Foot  Bipack  Magazine  and  Adapter, 

53,  58-63,  July  1949. 

Hoist,  Bert,  Production  and  Significance 
of  Newsreels— The  Film  Library,  47, 
365-366,  Nov.  1946. 

Hood,  H.  J.,  Chairman,  16-Mm  and  8- 
Mm  Motion  Picture  Committee  Report, 

54,  754-755,  June  1950. 

Hopkins,  H.  F.,  with  Keith,  C.  R.,  New 
Theater  Loudspeaker  System,  51,  385- 
398,  Oct.  1948. 

Hopper,  F.  L.,  Noise  Considerations  in 
Sound-Recording  Transmission  Systems, 
54,  129-139,  Feb.  1950. 

Corrective  Networks,  48,  253-260, 

Mar.  1947. 

Hopper,  F.  L.,  with  Moody,  R.  C.,  A 
Simplified  Recording  Transmission  Sys- 
tem, 47,  132-141,  Aug.  1946. 

Wave  Propagation  and  Outdoor 

Field  Tests  of  a  Loudspeaker  System, 
46,  115-123,  Feb.  1946. 

Howell,  H.  A.,  Magnetic  Sound  Record- 
ing on  Coated  Paper  Tape,  48,  36-49, 
Jan.  1947. 

Huse,  E.,  with  Simmons,  N.  L.,  Current 
Black-and-White  Duplicating  Tech- 
niques Used  in  Hollywood,  49,  316- 
333,  Oct.  1947. 

Hutton,  A.  C.,  with  Cummings,  J.  W., 
and  Silfin,  Howard,  Spontaneous  Igni- 
tion of  Decomposing  Cellulose  Nitrate 
Film,  54,  268-274,  Mar.  1950. 

Huxford,  W.  S.,  with  Olsen,  H.  N.,  Elec- 
trical and  Radiation  Characteristics  of 
Flashlamps,  55,  285-298,  Sept.  1950. 

Hyndman,  Donald  E.,  Chairman,  State- 
ment on  Theater  Television,  53,  354- 
362,  Oct.  1949. 

(Moderator),  Television  Forum 

Discussion,  53,  124-127,  Aug.  1949. 


HYN 


— —  Chairman,  Theater  Television,  52, 
243-267,  Mar.  1949. 

International  Motion  Picture  Stand- 
ards, 48,  126-128,  Feb.  1947. 

Achievements  of  the  SMPE  for 

1946,  48,  63-64,  Jan.  1947. 

President,  Citations,  47,  124-131, 

Aug.  1946. 

Hyndman,  Donald  E.,  President,  with 
Maurer,  John  A.,  Engineering  Vice- 
President,  The  Past  and  Future  of  the 
Society  of  Motion  Picture  Engineers, 
47,  212-224,  Sept.  1946. 

Hyten,  C.  W.,  with  Boyce,  M.  A.,  Indus- 
trial Control  Applied  to  the  Projection 
Room,  50,  248-253,  Mar.  1948. 

Idelson,  Martin,  Note  on  Metol  Analysis 
in  Photographic  Developers,  54,  492- 
493,  April.  1950. 

Inglis,  A.  F.,  with  Mclntosh,  F.  H., 
Color  Television,  55,  343-363,  Oct. 
1950. 

Ireland,  R.  P.,  A  Motion  Picture  Film- 
Developing  Machine,  50,  50-53,  Jan. 
1948. 

Isaac,  Lester  B.,  Television  and  the  Mo- 
tion Picture  Theater,  47,  482-486, 
Dec.  1946. 

Isom,  W.  R.,  Proposed  16-Mm  and  8- 
Mm  Sprocket  Standards  (Discussion), 
51,  437-440,  Oct.  1948. 

Ives,  C.  E.,  with  Kunz,  C.  J.,  Simplifica- 
tion of  Motion  Picture  Processing 
Methods,  55,  3-26,  July  1950. 

The  Use  of  Desiccants  with  Unde- 
veloped Photographic  Film,  46,  475- 
510,  June  1946. 

Jacobs,  A.,  The  Practical  Problems  of 
16-Mm  Sound,  48, 116-125,  Feb.  1947. 

Jantzen,  W.  L.,  Carpet  Wear  Increased 
with  Sponge  Rubber,  50,  436-438, 
May  1948. 

Jennings,  A.  B.,  with  Stanton,  W.  A., 
and  Weiss,  J.  P.,  Synthetic  Color- 
Forming  Binders  for  Photographic 
Emulsions,  55,  455-476,  Nov.  1950. 

Johnson,  Gerald  A.,  A  Processing  Con- 
trol Sensitometer,  47,  474-481,  Dec. 
1946. 

Johnson,  S.  W.,  Factors  Affecting  Spuri- 
ous Printing  in  Magnetic  Tapes,  52, 
619-628,  June  1949. 


Johnson,  S.  W.,  with  Dimmick,  G.  L., 
Optimum  High-Frequency  Bias  in 
Magnetic  Recording,  51,  489-500,  Nov. 
1948. 

Johnson,  S.  W.,  with  Drew,  R.  O.,  Pre- 
liminary Sound  Recording  Tests  with 
Variable-Area  Dye  Tracks,  46,  387- 
404,  May  1946. 

Johnson,  Wayne  R.,  An  Experimental 
Electronic  Background  Television  Pro- 
jection System,  55,  60-66,  July  1950. 

Jones,  G.  A.,  with  Eyles,  E.  D.,  Recent 
British  Equipment  and  Technique  for 
High-Speed  Cinematography,  53,  502- 
514,  Nov.  1949. 

Jones,  M.  T.,  Motion  Picture  Screen  Light 
as  a  Function  of  Carbon-Arc-Crater 
Brightness  Distribution,  49,  218-240, 
Sept.  1947. 

Jones,  M.  T.,  with  Bowditch,  F.  T., 
Optimum  Performance  of  High-Bright- 
ness Carbon  Arcs,  52,  395-406,  Apr. 
1949. 

Jones,  Ron  W.,  The  Application  of  Pure 
Mathematics  to  the  Solution  of  Geneva 
Ratios,  47,  55-62,  July  1946. 


Kaprelian,  E.  K.,  Objective  Lenses  of 
//I  Aperture  and  Greater,  53,  86-99, 
July  1949. 

Kautzky,  R.  W.,  with  Talley,  C.  E.,  A 
Modern  Sound-Reinforcement  System 
for  Theaters,  50,  149-161,  Feb.  1948. 

Kaylor,  J.  W.,  with  Holm,  W.  R.,  1000- 
Foot  Bipack  Magazine  and  Adapter, 
53,  58-63,  July  1949. 

Kaylor,  J.  W.,  with  Sater,  R.  A.,  Im- 
proved 35-Mm  Synchronous  Counter, 
52,  333-336,  Mar.  1949. 

Keith,  C.  R.,  Basic  Research  for  Motion 
Pictures,  54,  127-128,  Feb.  1950. 

Sound-on-Film  Recording  for  Tele- 
vision Broadcasting,  53,  114-116,  Aug. 
1949. 

Editorial  Policy  of  the  Journal,  52, 

578-579,  May  1949. 

Inter-Society  Color  Council  Sym- 
posium—Foreword, 52,  156,  Feb.  1949. 

Report  of  the  General  Secretary, 

48,  203-210,  Mar.  1947. 

The  ASA  Sectional  Committee  on 

Motion  Pictures,  Z22,  48,  67-69,  Jan. 
1947. 


60 


LAR 


Keith,  C.  R.,  with  Hopkins,  H.  F.,  New 

Theater  Loudspeaker  System,  51,  385- 
398,  Oct.  1948. 

Keith,  C.  R.,  with  Pagliarulo,  V.,  Direct- 
Positive  Variable-Density  Recording 
with  the  Light  Valve,  52,  690-698, 
June  1949. 

Kelley,  W.  F.,  Motion  Picture  Research 
Council,  51,  418-423,  Oct.  1948. 

Kellogg,  Edward  W.,  Chairman,  Pro- 
posed Standards  for  the  Measurement 
of  Distortion  in  Sound  Recording,  51, 
449-467,  Nov.  1948. 

Proposed     16-Mm     and     8-Mm 

Sprocket  Standards   (Discussion),  51, 
437-440,  Oct.  1948. 

Kendall,  O.  K.,  16-Mm  Film  Color  Com- 
pensation, 54,  464-479,  Apr.  1950. 

Keuning,  K.  J.,  with  Alink,  R.  J.  H.,  and 
Dippel,  C.  J.,  The  Metal-Diazonium 
System  for  Photographic  Reproduc- 
tions, 54,  345-366,  Mar.  1950. 

Kimball,  D.  D.,  Motion  Picture  Theater 
Air  Conditioning,  51,  52-69,  July  1948. 

Kingslake,  Rudolf,  Chairman,  Report  of 
Lens-Calibration  Subcommittee,  53, 
368-378,  Oct.  1949. 

New  Series  of  Lenses  for  16-Mm 

Cameras,  52,  509-521,  May  1949. 

Photometric  Calibration  of  Lenses 

-Preface,  49,  95,  Aug.  1947. 

Kissack,  Robert  A.,  Jr.,  Army  Film  Dis- 
tribution and  Exhibition,  46,  26-29, 
Jan.  1946. 

Knapp,  Robert  T.,  Special  Cameras  and 
Flash  Lamps  for  High-Speed  Under- 
water Photography,  49,  64-81,  July 
1947. 

Koch,  G.  J.,  Interference  Mirrors  for  Arc 
Projectors,  55,  439-442,  Oct.  1950. 

Koch,  R.  A.,  with  Clasby,  F.  X.,  Wartime 
Naval  Photography  of  the  Electronic 
Image,  50,  189-198,  Mar.  1948. 

Kolb,  F.  J.,  Jr.,  Air  Cooling  of  Motion 
Picture  Film  for  Higher  Screen  Illumi- 
nation, 53,  635-664,  Dec.  1949. 

Kolb,  F.  J.,  Jr.,  with  Robertson,  A.  C., 
and  Talbot,  R.  H.,  A  Method  for  De- 
termining the  Shape  of  the  Image  Sur- 
face in  16-Mm  Projection,  48,  569- 
585,  June  1947. 


Kolb,  O.  K.,  Magnetic  Sound  Film  Devel- 
opments in  Great  Britain,  55,  496-508, 
Nov.  1950. 

Kreuzer,  Barton,  Progress  Report— Thea- 
ter Television,  53,  128-136,  Aug.  1949. 

Kudar,  John,  Optical  Problems  of  the 
Image  Formation  in  High-Speed  Mo- 
tion Picture  Cameras,  47,  400-402, 
Nov.  1946. 

Kunz,  C.  J.,  with  Ives,  C.  E.,  Simplifica- 
tion of  Motion  Picture  Processing 
Methods,  55,  3-26,  July  1950. 

The  Use  of  Desiccants  with  Unde- 
veloped Photographic  Film,  46,  475- 
510,  June  1946. 


Labin,  E.,  The  Eidophor  Method  for 
Theater  Television,  54,  393-406,  Apr. 
1950. 

La  Grande,  Frank,  with  Daily,  C.  R., 
and  Denney,  B.  H.,  16-Mm  Release 
Printing  Using  35-  and  32-Mm  Film, 
52,  211-222,  Feb.  1949. 

Lance,  T.  M.  C.,  Improvements  in  Large- 
Screen  Television  Projection,  55,  509- 
524,  Nov.  1950. 

Lankes,  L.  R.,  Historical  Sketch  of  Tele- 
vision's Progress,  51,  223-229,  Sept. 
1948. 

Lansing,  James  B.,  New  Permanent  Mag- 
net Public  Address  Loudspeaker,  46, 
212-219,  Mar.  1946. 

Larsen,  J.  A.,  Magnetic  Device  for  Cu- 
ing Film,  52,  326-332,  Mar.  1949. 

Larsen,  P.  J.,  FCC  Allocation  of  Fre- 
quencies for  Theater  Television,  53, 
351-353,  Oct.  1949. 

Statement   of   SMPE   on   Revised 

Frequency   Allocations,    48,    183-203, 
Mar.  1947. 

Chairman,  Report  of  the  Commit- 
tee on  Television  Projection  Practice, 
47,  118-119,  Aug.  1946. 

La  Rue,  M.  W.,  Jr.,  Precision  Lens-Test- 
ing and  Copying  Camera,  53,  379-388, 
Oct.  1949. 

La  Rue,  M.  W.,  Sr.,  and  La  Rue,  M.  W., 
Jr.,  Adaptions  and  Applications  of  16- 
Mm  Motion  Picture  Equipment  to 
Medical  and  Scientific  Needs,  49,  241- 
247,  Sept.  1947. 


•     61 


LAW 


Lawrence,  T.,  Some  Special  Problems  of 
Post-Synchronization  Mixing,  48,  317- 
323,  Apr.  1947. 

Lawrenson,  Harry,  Production  and  Sig- 
nificance of  Newsreels— Foreign  Edi- 
tions, 47,  361-364,  Nov.  1946. 

Lee,  R.  W.,  Lead-Sulfide  Photoconduc- 
tive  Cells  in  Sound  Reproducers,  53, 
691-706,  Dec.  1949. 

Lee,  S.  C.,  Influence  of  West  Coast  De- 
signers on  the  Modern  Theater,  50, 
329-336,  Apr.  1948. 

Leshing,  M.  S.,  Improved  Film  Splicer, 
50,  68-73,  Jan.  1948. 

Lester,  H.  M.,  High-Speed  and  Time- 
Lapse  Photography  in  Industry  and 
Research,  52,  71-80,  Supplement  (Part 
II),  Mar.  1949. 

Electronic  Flash  tube  Illumination 

for  Specialized  Motion  Picture  Pho- 
tography, 50,  208-232,  Mar.  1948. 

Levenson,  G.  I.  P.,  Chemical  Economics 
of  Spray  Processing,  53,  665-690,  Dec. 
1949. 

Lewin,  G.,  A  New  Blooping  Device,  48, 
343-347,  Apr.  1947. 

Lewin,  G.,  with  Misener,  G.  C.,  An  Ap- 
plication of  Direct-Positive  Sound 
Track  in  16-Mm  Release  Processing 
by  Duplication  Method,  46,  167-177, 
Mar.  1946. 

Lewis,  Charles  E.,  The  High  Cost  of 
Poor  Projection,  47,  295-298,  Oct. 
1946. 

Lewis,  R.  E.,  A  Survey,  8-Mm  Problems, 
49,  439-452,  Nov.  1947. 

Lewis,  R.  E.,  with  Froula,  H.  C.,  Use  of 
G-3  Film-Processing  Tank,  50,  474- 
488,  May  1948. 

Lewis,  R.  E.,  with  McLaren,  Norman, 
Synthetic  Sound  on  Film,  50,  233-247, 
Mar.  1948. 

Lidfeldt,  A.  L.,  New  View  Finder  for  the 
Fastax  Camera,  53,  598-601,  Nov. 
1949. 

Linko,  M.  C.,  Color  Cinematography  in 
the  Mines,  54,  199-208,  Feb.  1950. 

Little,  R.  V.,  Jr.,  Developments  in  Large- 
Screen  Television,  51,  37-46,  July  1948. 

Film  Projectors  for  Television,  48, 

93-110,  Feb.  1947. 

Lockner,  A.,  A  Stabilization  System  by 
Rate  Measurement,  49,  88-92,  July 
1947. 


Logan,  H.  L.,  Brightness  and  Illumina- 
tion Requirements,  51,  1-12,  July  1948. 

Lorance,  G.  T.,  with  Dibble,  F.  B.,  and 
Reed,  H.  J.,  A  Sturdy,  High-Quality 
16-Mm  Projector,  54,  171-182,  Feb. 
1950. 

Lovick,  R.  C.,  with  Evans,  C.  H.,  Zero- 
Shift  Test  for  Determining  Optimum 
Density  in  Variable-Width  Sound  Re- 
cording, 52,  522-533,  May  1949. 

Lozier,  W.  W.,  Chairman,  Screen  Bright- 
ness Committee  Report,  54,  756-757, 
June  1950. 

Lozier,  W.  W.,  with  Bushong,  R.  M., 
New  13.6-Mm  Hitex  Super  High-In- 
tensity Carbon,  54,  725-731,  June 
1950. 

Lozier,  W.  W.,  with  Zavesky,  R.  J.,  In- 
creased Light  for  Projection  of  16-Mm 
Film  with  Carbon  Arcs,  48,  447-453, 
May  1947. 

Lozier,  W.  W.,  with  Zavesky,  R.  J.,  and 
Gertiser,  C.  J.,  Screen  Illumination 
with  Carbon  Arc  Motion  Picture  Pro- 
jection Systems,  48,  73-81,  Jan.  1947. 

Lubcke,  H.  R.,  Effect  of  Time  Element 
in  Television  Program  Operations,  48, 
543-547,  June  1947. 

Lyman,  D.  F.,  Chairman,  Report  of  the 
Committee  on  16-Mm  and  8-Mm 
Motion  Pictures,  47.  107-110,  Aug. 
1946. 

Lyman,  D.  F.,  with  Chandler,  J.  S.,  and 
Martin,  L.  R.,  Proposed  16-Mm  and  8- 
Mm  Sprocket  Standards  (Discussion), 
51,  437-440,  Oct.  1948. 

Proposals  for  16-Mm  and  8-Mm 

Sprocket  Standards,  48,  483-520,  June 
1947. 


Macbeth,  Norman,  with  Nickerson, 
Dorothy,  Spectral  Characteristics  of 
Light  Sources,  52,  157-183,  Feb.  1949. 

Maguire,  E.  C.,  New  York  Motion  Pic- 
ture Production,  50,  4-7,  Jan.  1948. 

Main,  C.  A.,  with  Hinz,  E.  R.,  and  Muhl, 
Elinor  P.,  High-Speed  Photography  of 
Reflection-Lighted  Objects  in  Tran- 
sonic Wind  Tunnel  Testing,  55,  613- 
626,  Dec.  1950. 

Maloff,  I.  G.,  Optical  Problems  in  Large- 
Screen  Television,  51,  30-36,  July 
1948. 


62 


MIL 


Manderfeld,  E.  C.,  with  Miller,  Harold, 
35-Mm  Process  Projector,  51,  373-384, 
Oct.  1948. 

Manley,  H.  A.,  with  Crane,  G.  R.,  A 

Simplified  All-Purpose  Film  Recording 
Machine,  46,  465-474,  June  1946. 

Mannon,  Lloyd,  Elimination  of  the  Fire 
Hazard  of  Projectors  Using  Nitrate 
Film,  50,  17S-176,  Feb.  1948. 

Mansberg,  H,  P.,  with  Berkley,  Carl, 
Techniques  in  High-Speed  Cathode- 
Ray  Oscillography,  53,  549-578,  Nov. 
1949. 

Martin,  L.  R.,  with  Chandler,  J.  S.,  and 
Lyman,  D.  S.,  Proposed  16-Mm  and  8- 
Mm  Sprocket  Standards  (Discussion), 
51,  437-440,  Oct.  1948. 

Proposals  for  16-Mm  and  8-Mm 

Sprocket  Standards,  48,  483-520,  June 
1947. 

Maslach,  G.,  with  Hall,  J.  S.,  and  Mayer, 
A.,  A  16-Mm  Rapid  Film  Processor, 
55,  27-36,  July  1950. 

Masterson,  Earl,  35-Mm  Magnetic-Re- 
cording System,  51,  481-488,  Nov. 
1948. 

Mathot,  J.,  with  Coutant,  A.,  A  Reflex 
35-Mm  Magazine  Motion  Picture 
Camera,  55,  173-179,  Aug.  1950. 

Matthews,  Glenn  E.,  Citation  on  the 
Work  of  Charles  J.  Kunz,  Herbert  E. 
Goldberg  and  Charles  E.  Ives,  46,  1-3, 
Jan.  1946. 

Maurer,  John  A.,  Optical  Sound-Track 
Printing,  50,  458-473,  May  1948. 

Maurer,  John  A.,  Engineering  Vice- 
President,  with  Hyndman,  Donald  E., 
President,  The  Past  and  Future  of  the 
Society  of  Motion  Picture  Engineers, 
47,  212-224,  Sept.  1946. 

Maxfield,  J.  P.,  Auditorium  Acoustics,  51, 
169-183,  Aug.  1948. 

Mayer,  A.,  with  Hall,  J.  S.,  and  Maslach, 
G.,  A  16-Mm  Rapid  Film  Processor, 
55,  27-36,  July  1950. 

McCoy,  J.  E.,  with  Warner,  H.  P., 
Theater  Television  Today,  53,  321- 
350,  Oct.  1949. 

McGrath,  Warren  M.,  Production  and 
Significance  of  Newsreels— Newsreel 
Sound,  47,  371-375,  Nov.  1946. 

Mclnnis,  Walter,  Production  and  Sig- 
nificance of  Newsreels— The  Newsreel 


Cameraman,  47,  368-371,  Nov.  1946. 

Mclntosh,  F.  H.,  with  Inglis,  A.  F.,  Color 
Television,  55,  343-363,  Oct.  1950. 

McKie,  Robert  V.,  Variable-Area  Sound 
Track  Requirements  for  Reduction 
Printing  onto  Kodachrome,  55,  45-52, 
July  1950. 

McKusick,  Wayne,  with  Bornemann,  Wil- 
liam, Illuminating  System  and  Light 
Control  for  16-Mm  Continuous  Optical 
Printer,  54,  480-482,  Apr.  1950. 

McLaren,  Norman,  with  Lewis,  R.  E., 
Synthetic  Sound  on  Film,  50,  233- 
247,  Mar.  1948. 

McNamara,  J.  J.,  General  Theater  Con- 
struction, 50,  322-327,  Apr.  1948. 

Means,  P.  B.,  Jr.,  with  Brunner,  A.  H., 
Jr.,  and  Zappert,  R.  H.,  Analysis  of 
Developers  and  Bleach  for  Ansco  Color 
Film,  53,  25-35,  July  1949. 

Merkur,  I.  I.,  A  New  Motion  Picture 
Film  Splicer,  48,  238-242,  Mar.  1947. 

Mertz,  Pierre,  Perception  of  Television 
Random  Noise,  54,  8-34,  Jan.  1950. 

Meschter,  E.,  Television  Reproduction 
from  Negative  Films,  47,  165-181, 
Aug.  1948. 

A  Note  on  Chemical  Drag  Observed 

with  Variable-Density  Sound  Tracks, 
46,  111-114,  Feb.  1946. 

Meyer,  Herbert,  Sensitometric  Aspects  of 
Background  Process  Photography,  54, 
275-289,  Mar.  1950. 

Milholland,  Harry,  with  Goldsmith,  T. 
T.,  Jr.,  Television  Transcription  by 
Motion  Picture  Film,  51,  107-116, 
Aug.  1948. 

Miller,  A.  J.,  Motion  Picture  Laboratory 
Practice  for  Television,  53,  112-113, 
Aug.  1949. 

Miller,  C.  D.,  Half-Million  Stationary 
Images  per  Second  with  Refocused  Re- 
volving Beams,  53,  479-488,  Nov. 
1949. 

Miller,  E.  S.,  A  Projection  Reel  of  Im- 
proved Design,  48,  261-268,  Mar. 
1947. 

Miller,  Harold,  with  Manderfeld,  E.  C., 
35-Mm  Process  Projector,  51,  373- 
384,  Oct.  1948. 

Miller,  O.  E.,  Color  Temperature:  Its 
Use  In  Color  Photography,  54,  435- 
444,  Apr  1950. 


MIL 


Miller,  T.  H.,  Masking:  A  Technique  for 
Improving  the  Quality  of  Color  Re- 
productions, 52,  133-155,  Feb.  1949. 

Miller,  W.  C.,  Magnetic  Recording  for 
Motion  Picture  Studios,  48,  57-62,  Jan. 
1947. 

Miller,  Wesley  C.,  with  Crane,  G.  R., 
Modern  Film  Re-recording  Equipment, 
51,  399-417,  Oct.  1948. 

Milne,  G.  G.,  with  O'Brien,  Brian,  Mo- 
tion Picture  Equipment  for  Very  High- 
Speed  Photography,  52,  42-48,  Supple- 
ment (Part  II),  Mar.  1949. 

Motion  Picture  Photography  at  Ten 

Million  Frames  Per  Second,  52,  30-40, 
Jan.  1949. 

Misener,  G.  C.,  with  Lewin,  G.,  An  Ap- 
plication of  Direct-Positive  Sound 
Track  in  16-Mm  Release  Processing 
by  Duplication  Method,  46,  167-177, 
Mar.  1946. 

Moen,  L.,  with  Crandell,  F.  F.,  and 
Freund,  K.,  Effects  of  Incorrect  Color 
Temperature  on  Motion  Picture  Pro- 
duction, 55,  67-87,  July  1950. 

Mole,  P.,  with  Hankins,  M.  A.,  Design- 
ing Engine-Generator  Equipment  for 
Motion  Picture  Locations,  55,  197- 
212,  Aug.  1950. 

Monroe,  H.  S.,  Technical  Problems  of 
Film  Production  for  the  Navy's  Special 
Training  Devices,  47,  487-493,  Dec. 
1946. 

Moody,  R.  C.,  with  Hopper,  F.  L.,  A 
Simplified  Recording  Transmission  Sys- 
tem, 47,  132-141,  Aug.  1946. 

Wave  Propagation  and  Outdoor 

Field  Tests  of  a  Loudspeaker  System, 
46,  115-123,  Feb.  1946. 

Moon,  I.  A.,  A  Photoelectric  Film  Cuing 
System,  49,  364-371,  Oct.  1947. 

Moore,  Arnold  R.,  with  Glover,  Alan  M., 
A  Phototube  for  Dye  Image  Sound 
Track,  46,  379-386,  May  1946. 

Moran,  J.  A.,  Will  Film  Take  Over  the 
Television  Commercial?,  53,  120-123, 
Aug.  1949. 

Morgan,  T.  J.,  Design  Progress  in  an  8- 
Mm  Projector,  49,  453-462,  Nov.  1947. 

Morrison,  Jack,  Motion  Picture  Instruc- 
tion in  Colleges  and  Universities  (A 
Follow-Up  Study  of  the  1946  Report 


by  John  G.  Frayne),  55,  265-278, 
Sept.  1950. 

Moses,  James  A.,  Trends  of  16-Mm  Pro- 
jector Equipment  in  the  Army,  55, 
525-535,  Nov.  1950. 

Mosser,  A.,  with  Dunn,  L.,  35-Mm  Ansco 
Color  Theater  Prints  from  16-Mm 
Kodachrome,  55,  635-638,  Dec.  1950. 

Mueller,  William  A.,  Dubbing  and  Post- 
Synchronization  Studios,  47,  230-237, 
Sept.  1946. 

Mueller,  W.  A.,  with  Groves,  G.  R.,  Mag- 
netic Recording  in  the  Motion  Picture 
Studio,  52,  605-612,  June  1949. 

Muhl,  Elinor  P.,  with  Hinz,  E.  R.,  and 
Main,  C.  A.,  High-Speed  photography 
of  Reflection-Lighted  Objects  in  Tran- 
sonic Wind  Tunnel  Testing,  55,  613- 
626,  Dec.  1950. 

Muller,  J.  T.,  Measuring  Shock  with 
High-Speed  Motion  Pictures,  53,  579- 
587,  Nov.  1949. 

Murphey,  B.  F.,  with  Herr,  R.,  and  Wet- 
zel,  W.  W.,  Some  Distinctive  Proper- 
ties of  Magnetic-Recording  Media,  52, 
77-88,  Jan.  1949. 

Murray,  Allen  E.,  The  Photometric  Cali- 
bration of  Lens  Apertures,  47,  142- 
151,  Aug.  1946. 

Neidenberg,  L.  L.,  Control  Unit  for 
Operation  of  High-Speed  Cameras,  52, 
107-109,  Supplement  (Part  II),  Mar. 
1949. 

Nemec,  Boyce,  Your  Society— Report  of 
the  Executive  Secretary,  52,  453-457, 
Apr.  1949. 

Review  of  SMPE  Work  on  Screen 

Brightness,  50,  254-257,  Mar.  1948. 

Neumer,  A.  E.,  New  Series  of  Lenses  for 
Professional  16-Mm  Projection,  52, 
501-508,  May  1949. 

Neyhart,  A.  P.,  A  Simplified  Body-Cavity 
Camera,  54,  747-753,  June  1950. 

Nickerson,  Dorothy,  with  Macbeth,  Nor- 
man, Spectral  Characteristics  of  Light 
Sources,  52,  157-183,  Feb.  1949. 

Nivison,  W.  S.,  Methods  of  Analyzing 
High-Speed  Photographs,  52,  49-60, 
Supplement  (Part  II),  Mar.  1949. 

Nixon,  I.  L.,  Wilbur  B.  Rayton,  48,  217- 
219,  Mar.  1947. 


64 


FBI 


Noble,  J.  V.,  with  Baumert,  E.,  The  De- 
velopment of  an  Invisible  16-Mm  Film 
Splice,  48,  231-237,  Mar.  1947. 

Norling,  J.  A.,  Light  Control  by  Polariza- 
tion and  the  Application  of  Polarizers 
to  the  Stereoscopic  Process,  48,  129- 
144,  Feb.  1947. 

Norwood,  Don,  Light  Measurement  for 
Exposure  Control,  54,  585-602,  May 
1950. 

Null,  M.  R.,  with  Bowditch,  F.  T.,  and 
Zavesky,  R.  J.,  Carbon  Arcs  for  Motion 
Picture  and  Television  Studio  Light- 
ing, 46,  441-453,  June  1946. 

Nye,  H.,  Electronic  Fire  and  Gas  Light 
Effect,  48,  353-360,  Apr.  1947. 


O'Brien,  Brian,  with  Milne,  G.  G.,  Mo- 
tion Picture  Equipment  for  Very  High- 
Speed  Photography,  52,  42-48,  Supple- 
ment (Part  II),  Mar.  1949. 

Motion  Picture  Photography  at  Ten 

Million  Frames  Per  Second,  52,  30-40, 
Jan.  1949. 

O'Brien,  Richard  S.,  CBS  Television 
Staging  and  Lighting  Practices,  55, 
243-264,  Sept.  1950. 

Obst,  T.  J.,  with  Green,  E.  E.,  Bowen 
Ribbon-Frame  Camera,  53,  515-523, 
Nov.  1949. 

ODea,  Dorothy,  Magnetic  Recording  for 
the  Technician,  51,  468-480,  Nov. 
1948. 

Offenhauser,  Wm.  H.,  Jr.,  Chairman,  Re- 
port of  the  Subcommittee  on  16-Mm 
Film  Splices,  47,  1-11,  July  1946. 

Olsen,  H.  N.,  with  Huxford,  W.  S.,  Elec- 
trical and  Radiation  Characteristics  of 
Flashlamps,  55,  285-298,  Sept.  1950. 

Olson,  H.  F.,  with  Preston,  John,  Single- 
Element  Unidirectional  Microphone, 
52,  293-302,  Mar.  1949. 

Wide-Range  Loudspeaker  Develop- 
ments, 47,  327-352,  Oct.  1946. 

Otis,  C.  V.,  Standard  Quality  of  Photo- 
graphic Chemicals,  52,  534-538,  May 
1949. 

Overhage,  C.  F.  J.,  Chairman,  Report  of 
the  Color  Sensitometry  Subcommittee, 
54,  655-724,  June  1950. 

Owlett,  C.  T.,  Method  and  Equipment 
for  Checking  Motion  Picture  Appara- 
tus Speeds,  49,  471-478,  Nov.  1947. 


Fagliarulo,  V.,  with  Frayne,  J.  G.,  and 
Cunningham,  T.  B.,  An  Improved  200- 
Mil  Push-Pull  Density  Modulator,  47, 
494-518,  Dec.  1946. 

Pagliarulo,  V.,  with  Keith,  C.  R.,  Direct- 
Positive  Variable-Density  Recording 
with  the  Light  Valve,  52,  690-698, 
June  1949. 

Painter,  R.  O.,  High-Speed  Photography 
in  the  Automotive  Industry,  52,  90-96, 
Supplement  (Part  II),  Mar.  1949. 

Pakswer,  Serge,  with  Anderson,  Norman, 
Comparison  of  Lead-Sulfide  Photocon- 
ductive  Cells  with  Photoemissive 
Tubes,  52,  41-48,  Jan.  1949. 

Palmer,  W.  A.,  New  Automatic  Sound 
Slidefilm  System,  52,  320-325,  Mar. 
1949. 

Perkins,  C.  S.,  with  Seeley,  E.  S.,  Versa- 
tile Measuring  Instrument  Designed  for 
Theater  Sound  Service,  50,  554-562, 
June  1948. 

Pestrecov,  K.,  with  Hayes,  J.  D.,  Animar 
Series  of  Photographic  Lenses,  54, 
183-198,  Feb.  1950. 

Pettus,  J.  L.,  Disk  Recorder  for  Motion 
Picture  Production,  52,  417-426,  Apr. 
1949. 

Improved  Optical  Reduction  Sound 

Printer,  51,  586-589,  Dec.  1948. 

Pettus,  J.  L.,  with  Sachtleben,  Lawrence 
T.,  New  Variable-Area  Recorder  Opti- 
cal System,  50,  14-36,  Jan.  1948. 

Pfeiff,  F.  J.,  with  Seeley,  E.  S.,  Test- 
Film  Calibration— Proposed  Standards, 
52,  434-446,  Apr.  1949. 

Phyfe,  J.  D.,  Behavior  of  a  New  Blue- 
Sensitive  Phototube  in  Theater  Sound 
Equipment,  46,  405-408,  May  1946. 

Plank,  W.  C.,  Non-Intermittent  Motion 
Picture  Projection,  54,  745-746,  June 
1950. 

Potter,  R.  K.,  Possibilities  of  a  Visible 
Music,  52,  384-394,  Apr.  1949. 

Pozner,  W.  A.,  Synchronization  Tech- 
nique, 47,  191-212,  Sept.  1946. 

Preston,  John,  with  Olson,  H.  F.,  Single- 
Element  Unidirectional  Microphone, 
52,  293-302,  Mar.  1949. 

Wide-Range  Loudspeaker  Develop- 
ments, 47,  327-352,  Oct.  1946. 

Price,  B.,  The  Determining  Role  of  Re- 
search in  the  Future  of  the  Motion 
Picture,  48,  70-72,  Jan.  1947. 


65 


RAN 


Randall,  Howard,  with  Spielberger,  F. 
C.,  Four-Channel  Re-Recording  Sys- 
tem, 50,  502-504,  May  1948. 

Ranger,  R.  H.,  Sprocketless  Synchronous 
Magnetic  Tape,  54,  328-336,  Mar. 
1950. 

Ray,  R.  H.,  Use  of  35-Mm  Ansco  Color 
Film  for  16-Mm  Color  Release  Prints, 
53,  143-148,  Aug.  1949. 

Training-Film  Production  Problems, 

49,  203-208,  Sept.  1947. 

Rayton,  W.  B.,  A  New  Series  of  Camera 
Lenses  for  16-Mm  Cinematography, 
48,  211-216,  Mar.  1947. 

Read,  G.  W.,  with  Scoville,  R.  R.,  An 
Improved  Intermodulation  Measuring 
System,  50,  162-173,  Feb.  1948. 

Redernske,  R.  F.,  Electronic  Shutter 
Testers,  46,  409-423,  May  1946. 

Reed,  H.  J.,  with  Lorance,  G.  T.,  and 
Dibble,  F.  B.,  A  Sturdy,  High-Quality 
16-Mm  Projector,  54,  171-182,  Feb. 
1950. 

Rees,  H.  L.,  with  Anderson,  D.  H.,  Simul- 
taneous Determination  of  Elon  and 
Hydroquinone  in  Photographic  Devel- 
opers, 53,  268-284,  Sept.  1949. 

Rees,  Willis  M.,  with  Taylor,  Robert  B., 
A  Discussion  of  the  Acoustical  Proper- 
ties of  Fiberglas,  46,  52-63,  Jan.  1946. 

Rettinger,  M.,  A  Magnetic  Record-Repro- 
duce Head,  55,  377-390,  Oct.  1950. 

Rettinger,  M.,  with  Bloomberg,  D.  J.,  and 
Watson,  W.  O.,  A  Combination  Scor- 
ing, Re-recording,  arid  Preview  Studio, 
49,  3-26,  July  1947. 

Rettinger,  M.,  with  Singer,  K.,  Factors 
Governing  the  Frequency  Response  of 
a  Variable-Area  Film  Recording  Chan- 
nel, 47,  299-326,  Oct.  1946. 

Richey,  F.  A.,  with  Hanson,  W.  T.,  Jr., 
Three-Color  Subtractive  Photography, 
52,  119-132,  Feb.  1949. 
Ring,  Lester,  Display  Frames  in  the 
Motion  Picture  Theater,  51,  101-103, 
July  1948. 

Robertson,  A.  C.,  with  Simmons,  N.  L., 
The  Measurement  and  Control  of  Dirt 
in  Motion  Picture  Processing  Labora- 
tories, 46,  185-205,  Mar.  1946. 
Robertson,  A.  C.,  with  Kolb,  F.  J.,  Jr., 
and  Talbot,  R.  H.,  A  Method  for  De- 
termining the  Shape  of  the  Image  Sur- 


face  in   16-Mm   Projection,   48,  569- 
585,  June  1947. 

Robertson,  R.,  with  Audiger,  L.,  Gau- 
mont-Kalee  Model  21  Projector,  51, 
269-293,  Sept.  1948. 

Rodgers,  W.  F.,  Motion  Pictures  Tomor- 
row, 47,  120-123,  Aug.  1946. 

Rollins,  D.  M.,  Role  of  the  Theater  Dim- 
mer in  the  Neighborhood  Picture 
House,  50,  607-612,  June  1948. 

Rose,  Albert,  A  Unified  Approach  to  the 
Performance  of  Photographic  Film, 
Television  Pickup  Tubes  and  the  Hu- 
man Eye,  47,  273-294,  Oct.  1946. 

Runyan,  I.  V.,  with  Bates,  J.  E.,  Proc- 
essing Control  Procedures  for  Ansco 
Color  Film,  53,  3-24,  July  1949. 

Ryder,  Loren  L.,  Motion  Picture  Studio 
Use  of  Magnetic  Recording,  55,  605- 
612,  Dec.  1950. 

Report  of  the  President,  52,  3-4, 

Jan.  1949. 

Report  of  the  President,  51,  221- 

222,  Sept.  1948. 

Report  of  the  President,  50,  1-3, 

Jan.  1948. 

Report  of  the  President,  49,  1-2, 


July  1947. 

Modernization  Desires  of  a  Major 

Studio,  47,  225-229,  Sept.  1946. 

Sabine,  H.  J.,  Sound  Absorption  and  Im- 
pedance of  Acoustical  Materials,  49, 
262-278,  Sept.  1947. 

Sachtleben,  Lawrence  T.,  Wide-Track 
Optics  for  Variable- Area  Recorders, 
52,  89-96,  Jan.  1949. 

Proposed  16-Mm  and  8-Mm 

Sprocket  Standards  (Discussion),  51, 
437_440,  Oct.  1948. 

Sachtleben,  Lawrence  T.,  with  Pettus, 
J.  L.,  A  New  Variable-Area  Recorder 
Optical  System,  50,  14-36,  Jan.  1948. 

Sandell,  M.  L.,  What  Is  High-Speed 
Photography?,  52,  5-7,  Supplement 
(Part  II),  Mar.  1949. 

Sarchet,  G.  L.,  Preservation  and  Postwar 
Utilization  of  U.  S.  Navy  Combat  Film, 
48,  476-480,  May  1947. 

Sater,  R.  A.,  with  Kaylor,  J.  W.,  Im- 
proved 35-Mm  Synchronous  Counter, 
52,  333-336,  Mar.  1949. 

Savoury,  T.  S.,  Rubber  Floor  Coverings, 
50,  433-435,  May  1948. 


SLY 


Sawyer,  C.  R.,  Report  of  SMPE  Progress 
Committee  (1948),  52,  580-596,  May 
1949. 

Chairman,  Report  of  SMPE  Progress 

Committee  (1947),  50,  523-541,  June 
1948. 

Schade,  W.  E.,  A  New  //1.5  Lens  for 
Professional  16-Mm  Projectors,  54, 
337-344,  Mar.  1950. 

Schadlich,  K.,  with  Harsh,  H.  C.,  Labora- 
tory for  Development  Work  on  Color 
Motion  Pictures,  53,  50-57,  July  1949. 

Schlafly,  H.  J.,  with  Wilcox,  Roy,  Dem- 
onstration of  Large-Screen  Television 
at  Philadelphia,  52,  549-560,  May 
1949. 

Schlanger,  Ben,  Increasing  Effectiveness 
of  Motion  Picture  Presentation,  50, 
367-373,  Apr.  1948. 

Advancement  of  Motion  Picture 

Theater  Design,  50,  303-313,  Apr. 
1948. 

Schreiber,  Ernst  H.,  Video  Distribution 
Facilities  for  Television  Transmission, 
51,  574-585,  Dec.  1948. 

Schultz,  Edwin  W.,  Use  of  16-Mm  Mo- 
tion Pictures  for  Educational  Recondi- 
tioning, 51,  424-430,  Oct.  1948. 

Schwartz,  G.,  A  Proposed  Film  Lock  and 
Identification  Band,  48,  473-475,  May 
1947. 

Scoville,  R.  R.,  and  Read,  G.  W.,  An  Im- 
proved Intel-modulation  Measuring 
System,  50,  162-173,  Feb.  1948. 

Seary,  E.  G.,  Letter  to  the  Editor,  53, 
425,  Oct.  1949. 

Seary,  E.  G.,  with  Varden,  L.  E.,  Rapid 
Test  for  Ferricyanide  Bleach  Exhaus- 
tion, 47,  450-452,  Dec.  1946. 

Seeley,  E.  S.,  The  Contribution  of 
Theater  Service  to  Twenty  Years  of 
Motion  Picture  Sound  Progress,  48, 
423-436,  May  1947. 

Seeley,  E.  S.,  with  Perkins,  C.  S.,  Versa- 
tile Measuring  Instrument  Designed 
for  Theater  Sound  Service,  50,  554- 
562,  June  1948. 

Seeley,  E.  S.,  with  Pfeiff,  F.  J.,  Test-Film 
Calibration— Proposed  Standards,  52, 
434_446,  Apr,  1949. 

Selsted,  Walter  T.,  Synchronous  Record- 
ing on  Win.  Magnetic  Tape,  55,  279- 
284,  Sept.  1950. 


Shafer,  H.  J.,  Physical  Optic  Analysis  of 
Image  Quality  in  Schlieren  Photog- 
raphy, 53,  524-544,  Nov.  1949. 

Shaftan,  Kenneth,  A  Survey  of  High- 
Speed  Motion  Picture  Photography, 
54,  603-626,  May  1950. 

Shaner,  Vaughn,  C.,  with  Sparks,  Mary 
R.,  Application  of  Methyl  Ethyl  Ke- 
tone  to  the  Analysis  of  Developers  for 
Elon  and  Hydroquinone,  47,  409-417, 
Nov.  1946. 

Sherman,  N.  N.,  with  Gregor,  H.  P., 
Demineralization  of  Photographic 
Wash  Water  by  Ion  Exchange,  53, 
183-191,  Aug.  1949. 

Shirley,  C.  C.,  Navy  Photography  in  the 
Antarctic,  52,  19-29,  Jan.  1949. 

Silent,  H.  C.,  Remote  Control  and  Auto- 
matic Focusing  of  Lenses,  49,  130- 
138,  Aug.  1947. 

Silfin,  Howard,  with  Cummings,  J.  W., 
and  Hutton,  A.  C.,  Spontaneous  Ig- 
nition of  Decomposing  Cellulose  Ni- 
trate Film,  54,  268-274,  Mar.  1950. 

Simmons,  N.  L.,  and  Huse,  E.,  Current 
Black-and-White  Duplicating  Tech- 
niques Used  in  Hollywood,  49,  316- 
333,  Oct.  1947. 

Simmons,  N.  L.,  with  Robertson,  A.  C., 
The  Measurement  and  Control  of  Dirt 
in  Motion  Picture  Processing  Labora- 
tories, 46,  185-205,  Mar.  1946. 

Singer,  Kurt,  Preselection  of  Variable- 
Gain  Tubes  for  Compressors,  52,  684- 
689,  June  1949. 

High-Quality  Recording  Electronic 

Mixer,  52,  676-683,  June  1949. 

Continuously  Variable  Band-Elimi- 
nation Filter,  51,  203-210,  Aug.  1948. 

Versatile  Noise-Reduction  Ampli- 
fier, 50,  562-570,  June  1948. 

A  High-Quality  Recording  Power 

Amplifier,  48,  560-568,  June  1947. 

Singer,  K.,  with  Rettinger,  M.,  Factors 
Governing  the  Frequency  Response  of 
a  Variable-Area  Film  Recording  Chan- 
nel, 47,  299-326,  Oct.  1946. 

Slack,  C.  M.,  with  Ehrke,  L.  F.,  Zavales, 
C.  T.,  and  Dickson,  D.  C.,  New  De- 
velopments in  X-Ray  Motion  Pictures, 
52,  61-70,  Supplement  (Part  II),  Mar. 
1949. 

Slyfield,  C.  O.,  Tone  Control  for  Re-re- 
cording, 47,  453-456,  Dec,  1946. 


SME 


Smeallie,  J.  V.,  Buying  Carpet  by  the 
Pound,  50,  421-425,  May  1948. 

Smith,  Allen  G.,  The  Wartime  Record 
and  Post- War  Future  of  Projection  and 
Sound  Equipment,  46,  178-184,  Mar. 
1946. 

Smith,  Arthur  L.,  Economy  in  Small- 
Scale  Motion  Picture  Lighting,  55, 
180-188,  Aug.  1950. 

Smith,  Newland  F.,  An  Improved  Video 
System  for  Television  Studios,  55, 
477-484,  Nov.  1950. 

Smith,  Paul  V.,  with  Stanko,  Edward, 
Frenquency-Modulated  Audio-Fre- 
quency Oscillator  for  Calibrating  Flut- 
ter-Measuring Equipment,  52,  309- 
312,  Mar.  1949. 

Postwar  Test  Equipment  for  Theater 

Servicing,  47,  457-463,  Dec.  1946. 

Souther,  Howard  T.,  The  Illusion  of 
Depth  in  Motion  Pictures,  46,  245- 
253,  Apr.  1946,  The  Theory  and  Prac- 
tice of  Lighting  for  the  Camera,  46, 
254-271,  Apr.  1946. 

Sparks,  Mary  R.,  with  Shaner,  Vaughn 
C.,  Application  of  Methyl  Ethyl  Ke- 
tone  to  the  Analysis  of  Developers  for 
Elon  and  Hydroquinone,  47,  409-417, 
Nov.  1946. 

Spielberger,  F.  C.,  with  Randall, 
Howard,  Four-Channel  Re-recording 
System,  50,  502-504,  May  1948. 

Spiselman,  J.  W.,  Air  Purification  by  Gly- 
col  Vapor,  51,  70-78,  July  1948. 

Sponable,  E.  I.,  President's  Convention 
Address,  55,  559-561,  Dec.  1950. 

Report  of  the  President,  54,  3-7, 

Jan.  1950. 

Historical  Development  of  Sound 

Films,  Pts.  1-2,  48,  275-303,  Apr. 
1947;  Pts.  3-7,  48,  407-422,  May  1947. 

Stanko,  Edward,  with  Smith,  Paul  V., 
Frequency  -  Modulated  Audio  -  Fre- 
quency Oscillator  for  Calibrating  Flut- 
ter-Measuring Equipment,  52,  309- 
312,  Mar.  1949. 

Postwar  Test  Equipment  for  Theater 

Servicing,  47,  457-463,  Dec.  1946. 

Stanton,  W.  A.,  with  Jennings,  A.  B.,  and 
Weiss,  J.  P.,  Synthetic  Color-Forming 
Binders  for  Photographic  Emulsions, 
55,  455-476,  Nov.  1950. 


Stoiber,  J.,  with  Feldman,  W.,  and  Boon, 
J.  L.,  Television  Recording  Camera, 
51,  117-126,  Aug.  1948. 

Stone,  J.  McW.,  A  New  Slidefilm  Pro- 
jector, 50,  74-76,  Jan.  1948. 

Stott,  John  G.,  Chairman,  Laboratory' 
Practice  Committee  Report,  55,  21&- 
215,  Aug.  1950. 

The  Processing  of  Two-Color  Prints 

by  Deep-Tank  Methods,  49,  306-315, 
Oct.  1947. 

Streiffert,  J.  G.,  Callier  Q  of  Various 
Motion  Picture  Emulsions,  49,  506- 
522,  Dec.  1947. 

Streiffert,  J.  G.,  with  Clutz,  C.  W.,  and 
Altaian,  F.  E.,  35-Mm  to  16-Mm 
Sound  Reduction  Printer,  52,  669- 
675,  June  1949. 

Strickland,  W.  P.,  An  Analysis  of  Low- 
Reflection  Coatings  as  Applied  to 
Glass,  49,  27-36,  July  1947. 

Strohm,  J.  T.,  The  Mult-Efex  Titler  De- 
vice, 49,  544-546,  Dec.  1947. 

A  New  Sunshade  and  Filter  Holder 

for  16-  and  8-Mm  motion  Picture  Cam- 
eras, 49,  468-470,  Nov.  1947. 

Sultanoff,  M.,  A  100,000,000  Frame  Per 
Second  Camera,  55,  158-166,  Aug. 
1950. 

Sweet,  M.  H.,  An  Improved  Photomulti- 
plier  Tube  Color  Densitometer,  54,  35- 
62,  Jan.  1950. 

Szegho,  Constantin  S.,  Color  Cathode- 
Ray  Tube  with  Three  Phosphor  Bands, 
55,  367-376,  Oct.  1950. 

Talbot,  R.  H.,  Lubrication  of  16-Mm 
Films,  53,  285-292,  Sept.  1949. 

Talbot,  R.  H.,  with  Kolb,  F.  J.,  Jr.,  and 
Robertson,  A.  C.,  A  Method  for  De- 
termining the  Shape  of  the  Image  Sur- 
face in  16-Mm  Projection,  48,  569- 
585,  June  1947. 

Talley,  C.  E.,  with  Kautzky,  R.  W.,  A 
Modern  Sound-Reinforcement  System 
for  Theaters,  50,  149-161,  Feb.  1948. 

Tallian,  George,  with  Denney,  B.  H., 
Automatic  Tempo  Indicator,  52,  571- 
577,  May  1949. 

Taylor,  Robert  B.,  with  Rees,  Willis  M., 
A  Discussion  of  the  Acoustical  Prop- 
erties of  Fiberglas,  46,  52-63,  Jan. 
1946. 


68 


WAI 


Taylor,  S.  H.,  The  Drive-In  Theater,  50, 
337-343,  Apr.  1948. 

Templin,  E.  W.,  35-Mm  and  16-Mm 
Portable  Sound-Recording  System,  53, 
159-182,  Aug.  1949. 

Templin,  E.  W.,  with  Crane,  G.  R.,  and 
Frayne,  J.  G.,  Supplementary  Magnetic 
Facilities  for  Photographic  Sound  Sys- 
tems, 54,  315-327,  Mar.  1950. 

Thatcher,  J.  W.,  with  Whitney,  J.  R., 
Increased  Noise  Reduction  by  Delay 
Networks,  54,  295-302,  Mar.  1950. 

Thomas,  P.  M.,  with  Coles,  C.  H.,  Spe- 
cialized Photography  Applied  to  En- 
gineering in  the  Army  Air  Forces,  46, 
220-230,  Mar.  1946. 

Thompson,  L.,  The  Movie-Sound-8-Pro- 
jector,  49,  463-467,  Nov.  1947. 

Thompson,  R.  D.,  Television  Pickup  for 
Transparencies,  53,  137-142,  Aug. 
1949. 

Tinkham,  R.  J.,  with  Boyers,  J.  S.,  A 
Magnetic  Sound  Recorder  of  Advanced 
Design,  48,  29-35,  Jan.  1947. 

Townsend,  Charles  L.,  Specifications  for 
Motion  Picture  Films  Intended  for 
Television  Transmission,  55,  147-157, 
Aug.  1950. 

Townsley,  M.  G.,  An  Instrument  for 
Photometric  Calibration  of  Lens  Iris 
Scales,  49,  111-121,  Aug.  1947. 

A  New  Recorder  for  16-Mm  Buzz 

Track,  46,  206-211,  Mar.  1946. 

Trimble,  L.  S.,  with  Bowden,  F.  W., 
Colored  Trace  Oscillograms,  46,  231- 
236,  Mar.  1946. 

Tuttle,  C.  M.,  with  Brown,  F.  M.,  High- 
Speed  Processing  of  35-Mm  Pictures, 
54,  149-160  Feb.  1950. 

Tuttle,  F.  E.,  Improvements  in  High- 
Speed  Motion  Pictures  by  Multiple- 
Aperture  Focal-Plane  Scanners,  53, 
462-468,  Nov.  1949. 

High-Speed  Motion  Pictures  by 

Multiple-Aperture  Focal-Plane  Scan- 
ners, 53,  451-461,  Nov.  1949. 

Tylee,  F.  M.,  High-Speed  Motion  Pic- 
tures in  Full  Color,  53,  588-593,  Nov. 
1949. 

Underbill,  C.  R.,  Jr.,  The  Trend  in  Drive- 
in  Theaters,  54,  161-170,  Feb.  1950. 


van  Heuven,  E.  W.,  with  Elenbaas,  W., 
Water-Cooled  High-Pressure  Mercury- 
Discharge  Lamp  for  Direct-Current 
Operation,  53,  594-597,  Nov.  1949. 

Varden,  L.  E.,  with  Seary,  E.  G.,  Rapid 
Test  for  Ferricyanide  Bleach  Exhaus- 
tion, 47,  450-452,  Dec.  1946. 

Veneklasen,  P.  S.,  Physical  Measurements 
of  Loudspeaker  Performance,  52,  641— 
656,  June  1949. 

Vilbrandt,  C.  F.,  The  Projection  Life  of 
16-Mm  Film,  48,  521-542,  June  1947. 

Volmar,  Victor,  Foreign  Versions,  55, 
536-546,  Nov.  1950. 

Voskuil,  J.,  Origins  of  the  Magic  Lantern, 

51,  643-655,  Dec.  1948. 

Waddell,  John  H.,  Chairman,  Report  of 
High-Speed  Photography  Committee, 
53,  602-603,  Nov.  1949. 

Design  of  Rotating  Prisms  for  High- 
Speed  Cameras,  53,  49&-501,  Nov. 
1949. 

Foreword,  52,  3-4,  Supplement 

(Part  II),  Mar.  1949. 

A  Wide  Angle  35.-Mm  High-Speed 

Motion  Picture  Camera,  46,  87-102, 
Feb.  1946. 

Wagner,  Chris,  with  Bach,  Walter,  In- 
dustrial Sapphire  in  Motion  Picture 
Equipment,  54,  95-101,  Jan.  1950. 

Wall,  J.  M.,  Television  Recording  Camera 
Intermittent,  54,  732-734,  June  1950. 

Waller,  Fred,  The  Waller  Flexible  Gun- 
nery Trainer,  47,  73-87,  July  1946. 

Wallingsford,  Armour,  A  Film-Splicing 
and  Repair  Machine,  47,  254-257, 
Sept.  1946. 

Walls,  H.  L.,  Film-Collection  Program, 

52,  5-8,  Jan.   1949. 

Warn,     R.     E.,     Recording     Equipment 

Throughout  the  World,  53,  236-241, 

Sept.  1949. 
Warner,    H.    P.,    with    McCoy,    J.    E., 

Theater  Television  Today,  53,  321-350, 

Oct.  1949. 
Warren,  W.  W.,  Photographing  Things 

to  Come,  49,  82-87,  July  1947. 
Washer,  F.  E.,  Errors  in  Calibration  of 

the  /-Number,  51,  242-260,  Sept.  1948. 
Watson,  W.  O.,  with  Bloomberg,  Daniel 

J.,  A  New  Selsyn  Interlock  Selection 

System,  47,  469-473,  Dec.  1946. 


WAT 


Watson,  W.  O.,  with  Bloomberg,  Daniel 
J.,  and  Rettinger,  M.,  A  Combination 
Scoring,  Re-recording,  and  Preview 
Studio,  49,  3-26,  July  1947. 

Webber,  Richard,  Vacuum  Cleaning  of 
Theaters,  50,  439-441,  May  1948. 

Weiss,  J.  P.,  Sensitometric  Control  of  the 
Duping  Process,  47,  443-449,  Dec. 
1946. 

Weiss,  J.  P.,  with  Stanton,  W.  A.,  and 
Jennings,  A.  B.,  Synthetic  Color-Form- 
ing Binders  for  Photographic  Emul- 
sions, 55,  455-476,  Nov.  1950. 

West,  A.  G.  D.,  Development  of  Theater 
Television  in  England,  51,  127-168, 
Aug.  1948. 

Westheimer,  J.,  The  Simulation  of  Radar 
Presentations  for  Briefing  Purposes,  48, 
586-590,  June  1947. 

Westmijze,  W.  K.,  A  New  Method  of 
Counteracting  Noise  in  Sound  Film 
Reproduction,  47,  426-440,  Nov.  1946. 

Wetzel,  W.  W.,  with  Herr,  R.,  and  Mur- 
phey,  B.  F.,  Some  Distinctive  Proper- 
ties of  Magnetic-Recording  Media,  52, 
77-88,  Jan.  1949. 

Whelan,  W.  T.,  High-Speed  Photographic 
System  Using  Electronic  Flash  Light- 
ing, 52, 116-129  Supplement  (Part  II), 
Mar.  1949. 

Whelan,  W.  T.,  with  Anderson,  R.  A., 
High-Speed  Motion  Pictures  with  Syn- 
chronized Multiflash  Lighting,  50,  199- 
207,  Mar.  1948. 

White,  C.  F.,  with  Boyer,  M.  R.,  A  New 
Film  for  Photographing  the  Television 
Monitor  Tube,  47,  152-164,  Aug.  1946. 

White,  D.  R.,  Chairman,  Films  in  Tele- 
vision, 52,  363-379,  Apr.  1949. 

Whitney,  J.  R.,  with  Thatcher,  J.  W., 
Increased  Noise  Reduction  by  Delay 
Networks,  54,  295-302,  Mar.  1950. 

Wilcox,  Roy,  with  Schlafly,  H.  J.,  Dem- 
onstration of  Large-Screen  Television 
at  Philadelphia,  52,  549-560,  May 
1949. 

Williams,  R.  G.,  Dynamic  Luminous 
Color  for  Film  Presentation,  50,  374- 
388,  Apr.  1948. 


Wilson,  H.  H.,  Portable  16-Mm  Sound 
Projector,  51,  21-29,  July  1948. 

Wittich,  W.  A.,  Retooling  for  Education 
1948,  49,  187-190,  Sept.  1947. 

Wolfe,  Halley,  with  Frayne,  J.  G.,  Mag- 
netic Recording  in  Motion  Picture 
Techniques,  53,  217-235,  Sept.  1949. 

Wolfe,  W.  V.,  Report  of  the  SMPE  Com- 
mittee on  Progress,  48,  304r-316,  Apr. 
1947. 

Woolsey,  R.  A.,  Lighting  and  Exposure 
Control  in  Color  Cinematography,  48, 
548-553,  June  1947. 

Wyckoff,  C.  W.,  Twenty-Lens  High- 
Speed  Camera,  53,  469-478,  Nov. 
1949. 


Zappert,  R.  H.,  with  Brunner,  A.  H.,  Jr., 
and  Means,  P.  B.,  Jr.,  Analysis  of  De- 
velopers and  Bleach  for  Ansco  Color 
Film,  53,  25-35,  July  1949. 

Zavales,  C.  T.,  with  Slack,  C.M.,  Ehrke, 
L.  F.,  and  Dickson,  D.  C.,  New  De- 
velopments in  X-Ray  Motion  Pictures, 
52,  61-70,  Supplement  (Part  II),  Mar. 
1949. 

Zavesky,  R.  J.,  with  Bowditch,  F.  T.,  and 
Null,  M.  R.,  Carbon  Arcs  for  Motion 
Picture  and  Television  Studio  Lighting, 
46,  441-453,  June  1946. 

Zavesky,  R.  J.,  with  Gertiser,  C.  J.,  and 
Lozier,  W.  W.,  Screen  Illumination 
with  Carbon  Arc  Motion  Picture  Pro- 
jection Systems,  48,  73-81,  Jan.  1947. 

Zavesky,  R.  J.,  with  Lozier,  W.  W.,  In- 
creased Light  for  Projection  of  16-Mm 
Film  with  Carbon  Arcs,  48,  447-453, 
May  1947. 

Zoulis,  A.  C.,  Improved  Engineering  De- 
signs for  Stage  Doors,  Transparency 
Screens,  and  Water  Tank  Bulkheads, 
48,  348-352,  Apr.  1947. 

Zworykin,  V.  K.,  Motion  Pictures  and 
Television  (Convention  Address),  55, 
562-566,  Dec.  1950. 

New  Television  Camera  Tubes  and 

Some  Applications  Outside  the  Broad- 
casting Field,  55,  227-242,  Sept.  1950. 


•     70     • 


American  Standards  -  by  subjects 

These  standards  are  those  in  force  at  Index  press  time,  with  the  exception 
of  those  with   an   asterisk*    which  are  in  an  active   phase   of   revision. 


Apertures,  Camera 

8-Mm  Z22.19-1941* 

16-Mm  Silent Z22.7  -1941* 

16-Mm  Sound    Z22.13-1941* 

35-Mm  Sound    Z22.59-1947 

Apertures,  Printer 

16-Mm  Contact  ( positive  from  negative)    Z22.48-1946 

16-Mm  Contact  (reversal  dupes)   Z22.49-1946 

35-  to  16-Mm  ( 16-Mm  positive  prints)    Z22.46-1946 

35-  to  16-Mm  ( 16-,Mm  dupe  negative)    Z22.47-1946 

Apertures,  Projector 

8-Mm  Z22.20-1941* 

16-Mm  Silent Z22.8  -1941* 

16-Mm  Sound    Z22.14-1941* 

35-Mm  Sound Z22.58-1947 

Film,  Cores  for  Raw  Stock 

16-Mm   Z22.38-1944 

35-Mm   Z22.37-1944 

Film,  Cutting  and  Perforating 

8-Mm   Z22.17-1947 

16-Mm  Silent Z22.5  -1947 

16-Mm  Sound    Z22.12-1947 

35-Mm  Negative    Z22.34-1949 

35-Mm  Positive   Z22.36-1947 

Film,  Definition  of  Safety  Z22.31-1946 

Film  Density  Measurements Z22.27-1947 

( includes  Z38.2.5-1946) 

Film,  Emulsion  Position 

8-Mm  Negative    Z22.21-1946 

8-Mm  Positive   Z22.22-1947 

16-Mm  Negative  Silent   Z22.9  -1946 

16-Mm  Negative  Sound    Z22.15-1946 

16-Mm  Positive  Silent  Z22.10-1947 

16-Mm  Positive  Sound    Z22.16-1947 

35-Mm  Negative    Z22.2  -1946 

35-Mm  Positive    Z22.3  -1946 

Film,  Nomenclature  Z22.56-1947 

Film,  Processing  Tests 

Cross  Modulation    Z22.52-1946 

Intermodulation Z22.51-1946 

•     71     • 


AMERICAN  STANDARDS  —  by  subjects,  cont'd 

Filters,  Electrical Z22.33-1941* 

Projection  Rooms  and  Lenses Z22.28-1946 

ftaw  Stock,  Cutting  and  Perforating 

32-Mm  Sound    Z22.71-1950 

32-Mm  Silent Z22.72-1950 

Reels 

8-Mm  Z22.23-1941* 

16-Mm  Z22.11-1941* 

35-Mm  Z22.4  -1941* 

Reel  Spindles,  16-Mm   Z22.50-1946 

Release  Prints,  35-Mm    Z22.55-1947 

Screen 

Brightness    Z22.39-1944 

Dimensions    Z22.29-1948 

Mounting  Frames    Z22.78-1950 

Sound-Track  Dimensions 

16-Mm   Z22.41-1946 

35-Mm   Z22.40-1946 

35-Mm  Double  Width  Push-Pull,  Normal   Z22.69-1948 

35-Mm  Double  Width  Push-Pull,  Offset    Z22.70-1948 

Splices 

16-Mm  Silent Z22.24-1941* 

16-Mm  Sound    Z22.25-1941' 

Sprockets 

35-Mm Z22.35-1947 

16-Mm   ( SMPTE  Recommended  Practice ) 

Test  Films 

16-Mm  400-Cycle  Signal  Level    Z22.45-1946 

3000-Cycle  Flutter   Z22.43-1946 

5000-Cycle  Sound  Focusing Z22.42-1946 

7000-Cycle  Sound  Focusing     Z22.42-1946 

Buzz-Track  Z22.57-1947 

Multi-Frequency    Z22.44-1946 

Resolution  Target  (Test  Plate)    Z22.53-1946 

Travel  Ghost Z22.54-1946 

Sound  Projector    Z22.79-1950 

Scanning  Beam  Illumination,  Laboratory  Type Z22.80-1950 

Scanning  Beam,  Service  Type    Z22.81-1950 

35-Mm  1000-Cycle  Balancing    Z22.67-1948 

9000-Cycle  Sound  Focusing Z22.62-1948 

7000-Cycle  Sound  Focusing Z22.61-1949 

Scanning  Beam  Illumination,  Laboratory  Type Z22.66-1948 

Scanning  Beam,  Service  Type    Z22.65-1948 

Theater  Test  Reel  Z22.60-1948 

Buzz  Track    .  Z22.68-1949 


72 


American  Standards  -  by  numbers 


No. 


Title 


Vol.,  page,  issue 


7,22.1  Proposed,  Cutting  and  Perforating  Dimensions 

for    35-Mm     Motion    Picture    Combination 
Positive-Negative   Raw   Stock 

1930,  Cutting  and  Perforating  Negative 

and  Positive  Raw  Stock  for  35-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Film 

222. 2-1946  Emulsion  and  Sound  Record  Positions  in 
Camera  for  35-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture 
Film 


Z22. 3-1946       Emulsion  and  Sound  Record  Positions  in  Pro- 
jector for  35-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture  Film 


Z22. 4-1941        Projection  Reels  for  35-Mm  Film 

Z22. 5-1947  Cutting  and  Perforating  Dimensions  for  16-Mm 
Silent  Motion  Picture  Negative  and  Positive 
Raw  Stock 


Z22. 6-1941        Projector  Sprockets  for  16-Mm  Film 

Z22. 7-1950  Location  and  Size  of  Picture  Aperture  of 
16-Mm  Motion  Picture  Cameras 

Proposed 

Camera  Aperture  for  16-Mm  Silent  Film 

Z22. 8-1950        Location    and    Size    of    Picture    Aperture    of 

16-Mm  Motion  Picture  Projectors 
Proposed 

Projector  Aperture  for  16-Mm  Silent  Film 

Z22. 9-1946        Emulsion  Position  in  Camera  for  16-Mm  Silent 

Motion  Picture  Film 

Emulsion  Position  in  Camera— Negative  for 
16-Mm  Silent  Film 

Z22. 10-1947  Emulsion  Position  in  Projector  for  Direct  Front 
Projection  of  16-Mm  Silent  Motion  Picture 
Film 

Emulsion  Position  in  Projector— Positive  for 
Direct  Front  Projection  of  16-Mm  Silent 
Film 


52:  449,  Apr.  1949 
30:  261,  Mar.  1938 

46:  287,  Apr.  1946 

36:  220,  Mar.  1941 
46:  288,  Apr.  1946 
36:  221,  Mar.  1941 
36:  222,  Mar.  1941 
49:  172,  Aug.  1947 


36:  223, 
36:  224, 
54:  495, 

52:  339, 
36:  225, 


Mar.  1941 
Mar.  1941 
Apr.  1950 

Mar.  1949 
Mar.  1941 


54:  498,  Apr.  1950 


52:  342, 
36:  226, 

46:  289, 
36:  227, 


Mar.  1949 
Mar.  1941 

Apr.  1946 
Mar.  1941 


49:  555,  Dec.  1947 


36:  228,  Mar.  1941 


73 


AMERICAN  STANDARDS  —  by  numbers,  con? d 

No.  Title 


Vol.,  page,  issue 


PH22.11  Proposed,    16-Mm    Motion    Picture    Projection 

(Z22.ll)  Reels   (Second  Draft) 

(First  Draft)    

Projection    Reels    for    16-Mm    Motion    Picture 
Film 

Z22. 12-1947  Cutting  and  Perforating  Dimensions  for  16-Mm 
Sound  Motion  Picture  Negative  and  Positive 
Raw  Stock 


Z22. 13-1941      For  current  standard  see  Z22.7-1950 

Camera  Aperture  for  16-Mm  Sound  Film 

Z22. 14-1941      For  current  standard  see  Z22.8-1950 

Projector  Aperture  for  16-Mm  Sound  Film 

Z22. 15-1946  Emulsion  and  Sound  Record  Positions  in 
Camera  for  16-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture 
Film 

Emulsion     and     Sound     Record     Positions     in 
Camera— Negative  for  16-Mm  Sound  Film 

Z22. 16-1947  Emulsion  and  Sound  Record  Positions  in  Pro- 
jector for  Direct  Front  Projection  of  16-Mm 
Sound  Motion  Picture  Film 
Emulsion  and  Sound  Record  Positions  in 
Projector— Positive  for  Direct  Front  Projec- 
tion for  16-Mm  Sound  Film 

Z22. 17-1947  Cutting  and  Perforating  Dimensions  for  8-Mm 
Motion  Picture  Negative  and  Positive  Raw 
Stock 


Z22. 18-1941      8-Tooth  Projector  Sprockets  for  8-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Film 

Z22 . 19-1950      Location  and  Size  of  Picture  Aperture  of  8-Mm 
Motion  Picture  Cameras 

Proposed 

Camera  Aperture  for  8-Mm  Silent  Film 

Z22 . 20-1950      Location  and  Size  of  Picture  Aperture  of  8-Mm 
Motion  Picture  Projectors 

Proposed 

Projector  Aperture  for  8-Mm  Silent  Film 

Z22. 21-1946      Emulsion  Position  in  Camera  for  8-Mm  Silent 

Motion  Picture  Film 

Emulsion    Position    in    Camera— Negative    for 
8-Mm  Silent  Film 


56:  241,  Feb.  1951 

54:  229,  Feb.  1950 
36:  229,  Mar.  1941 


49:  174,  Aug.  1947 
36:  230,  Mar.  1941 
36:  231,  Mar.  1941 

36:  232,  Mar.  1941 
46:  290,  Apr.  1946 

36:  233,  Mar.  1941 
49:  556,  Dec.  1947 
36:  234,  Mar.  1941 

49:  176,  Aug.  1947 

36:  235,  Mar.  1941 
36:  236,  Mar.  1941 

54:  501,  Apr.  1950 


52:  345, 
36:  237, 


Mar.  1949 
Mar.  1941 


54:  503,  Apr.  1950 


52:  347, 
36:  238, 

46:  291, 
36:  239, 


Mar.  1949 
Mar.  1941 

Apr.  1946 
Mar.  1941 


74 


AMERICAN  STANDARDS  —  by  numbers,  cont'd 
No.  Title 


Vol.,  page,  issue 


Z22. 22-1947  Emulsion  Position  in  Projector  for  Direct  Front 
Projection  of  8-Mm  Silent  Motion  Picture 
Film 

Emulsion    Position    in    Projector— Positive    for 
Direct  Front  Projection  for  8-Mm  Silent  Film 

Z22. 23-1941  Projection  Reels  for  8-Mm  Silent  Motion  Pic- 
ture Film 

PH22.24  Proposed,   Splices   for    16-Mm   Motion   Picture 

(Z22.24  and         Films  for  Projection 
Z22.25) 

American    Recommended    Practice    for    Film 
Splices    Negative    and    Positive    for    16-Mm 
Silent  Film 
(See  Z22.25-1941) 

Z22. 25-1941      American    Recommended    Practice    for    Film 
Splices    Negative    and    Positive    for    16-Mm 
Sound  Film 
(See  PH22.24) 

Z22. 26-1941  American  Recommended  Practice  for  Sensi- 
tometry 

Z22. 27-1947      Method  of  Determining  Transmission  Density 

of  Motion  Picture  Films 

American    Recommended    Practice    for    Photo- 
graphic Density 

Z22. 28-1946      Dimensions  for  Projection  Rooms  and  Lenses 

for  Motion  Picture  Theaters 
American  Recommended  Practice  for  Projection 
Rooms 

Z22. 29-1948      Theater  Projection  Screens 

Dimensions  for  Theater  Projection  Screens 
American   Recommended   Practice   for   Projec- 
tion  Screens 

Z22. 30-1941  American  Recommended  Practice  for  Nomen- 
clature 

Z22.31-1946      Definition  for  Motion  Picture  Safety  Film 

American    Recommended    Practice    for    Safety 
Film 

Z22. 32-1941      Cancelled 

American   Recommended  Practice   for   Motion 
Picture    Film,    Theater    Sound    Fader    Setting 

Instructions 
American    Recommended    Practice    for    Fader 

Setting  Instructions 


49:  557,  Dec.  1947 
36:  240,  Mar.  1941 
36:  241,  Mar.  1941 
56:  358,  Mar.  1951 
36:  242,  Mar.  1941 

36:  243,  Mar.  1941 

36:  244,  Mar.  1941 

50:  283,  Mar.  1948 
36:  245,  Mar.  1941 

47:  259,  Sept.  1946 
36:  246,  Mar.  1941 


51:  535,  Nov.  1948 
47:  260,  Sept.  1946 
36:  247,  Mar.  1941 


36:  248,  Mar.  1941 


47:  261,  Sept.  1946 
36:  249,  Mar.  1941 


50:  276,  Mar.  1948 
48:  390,  Apr.  1947 


36:  250,  Mar.  1941 


75 


AMERICAN  STANDARDS  —  by  numbers,  cont'd 
No.  Title 


Vol.,  page,  issue 


Z22.33-1941      American  Recommended  Practice  for  Nomen- 
clature for  Filters 

Z22 . 34-1944      Recommended  for  Reaffirmation 

Cutting  and  Perforating  Negative  Raw  Stock 

for  35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Film 
Cutting  and  Perforating  Negative  and  Positive 
Raw  Stock  for  35-Mm  Film 

Z22. 35-1947      16-Tooth     35-Mm     Motion    Picture    Projector 

Sprockets 
16-Tooth  Projector  Sprockets  for  35-Mm  Film 

Z22. 36-1947      Cutting  and  Perforating  Dimensions  for  35-Mm 

Motion  Picture  Positive   Raw   Stock 
Cutting    and    Perforating    Positive    Raw    Stock 
for  35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Film 

Z22. 37-1944      Raw  Stock  Cores  for  35-Mm  Motion  Picture 
Film 


Z22. 38-1944      Raw  Stock  Cores  for   16-Mm   Motion  Picture 
Film 

Z22. 39-1944      Screen  Brightness  for  35-Mm  Motion  Pictures 


Z22. 40-1950 

Z22. 41-1946 
Z22. 42-1946 
Z22. 43-1946 
Z22. 44-1946 

Z22. 45-1946 
Z22. 46-1946 


Dimensions  and  Locations  for  Sound  Records 
and  Scanning  Area  of  35-Mm  Sound  Motion 
Picture  Prints 

Sound  Records  and  Scanning  Area  of  35-Mm 
Sound  Motion  Picture  Prints 

Sound  Records  and  Scanning  Area  of  16-Mm 
Sound  Motion  Picture  Prints 

Sound-Focusing  Test  Films  for  16-Mm  Sound 
Motion  Picture  Projection  Equipment 

3000-Cycle  Flutter  Test  Film  for  16-Mm 
Sound  Motion  Picture  Projectors 

Specification  for  Multi-Frequency  Test  Film 
for  Field  Testing  16-Mm  Sound  Motion  Pic- 
ture Projection  Equipment 

Specifications  for  400-Cycle  Signal  Level  Test 
Film  for  16-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture 
Projection  Equipment 

16-Mm  Positive  Aperture  Dimensions  and 
Image  Size  for  Positive  Prints  Made  from 
35-Mm  Negatives 


36:  252,  Mar.  1941 


52:  358,  Mar.  1949 
43:  124,  Aug.  1944 

36:  254,  Mar.  1941 


49:  178,  Aug.  1947 
36:  255,  Mar.  1941 
49:  179,  Aug.  1947 
43:  125,  Aug.  1944 

47:  262,  Sept.  1946 
43:  126,  Aug.  1944 
47:  263,  Sept.  1946 
43:  127,  Aug.  1944 

47:  264,  Sept.  1946 
43:  128,  Aug.  1944 

56:  114,  Jan.  1951 
46:  292,  Apr.  1946 
46:  293,  Apr.  1946 
46:  294,  Apr.  1946 
46:  295,  Apr.  1946 
46:  296,  Apr.  1946 

46:  297,  Apr.  1946 
46:  298,  Apr.  1946 


76 


AMERICAN  STANDARDS  —  by  numbers,  cont'd 

No.  Title 


Vol.,  page,  issue 


222. 47-1 946  Negative  Aperture  Dimensions  and  Image  Size 
for  16-Mm  Duplicate  Negatives  Made  from 
35-Mm  Positive  Prints 

Z22. 48-1946  Printer  Aperture  Dimensions  for  Contact  Print- 
ing 16-Mm  Positive  Prints  from  16-Mm  Nega- 
tives 

Z22. 49-1946  Printer  Aperture  Dimensions  for  Contact  Print- 
ing 16-Mm  Reversal  and  Color  Reversal 
Duplicate  Prints 

Z22 . 50-1946  Reel  Spindles  for  16-Mm  Motion  Picture  Projec- 
tors 

Z22. 51-1946  Method  of  Making  Intermodulation  Tests  on 
Variable-Density  16-Mm  Sound  Motion 
Picture  Prints 

Z22. 52-1946  Method  of  Making  Cross-Modulation  Tests  on 
Variable- Area  16-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture 
Prints 

Z22. 53-1946  Method  of  Determining  Resolving  Power  of 
16-Mm  Motion  Picture  Projector  Lenses 

Z22. 54-1946  Method  of  Determining  Freedom  from  Travel 
Ghost  in  16-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture 
Projectors 

Z22. 55-1947  Specification  for  35-Mm  Sound  Motion  Picture 
Release  Prints  in  Standard  2000-Foot  Lengths 

Z22. 56-1 947      Film  Nomenclature  (Reference  is  only  descrip- 
tion of  the  separately  published  Standard) 
Z52  War  Standard   

Z22. 57-1947  Buzz-Track  Test  Film  for  16-Mm  Motion  Pic- 
ture Sound  Reproducers 

Z22. 58-1947  Picture  Projection  Aperture  of  35-Mm  Sound 
Motion  Picture  Projectors 

Z22. 59-1947  Photographing  Aperture  of  35-Mm  Sound  Mo- 
tion Picture  Cameras 

Z22. 60-1948     Theater  Sound  Test  Film  for  35-Mm  Motion 

Picture   Sound   Reproducing   Systems 
Proposed 

Z22. 61-1949      Sound  Focusing  Test  Film  for  35-Mm  Motion 

Picture  Sound  Reproducers   (Service  Type) 

Proposed 

Z22. 62-1948      Sound  Focusing  Test  Film  for  35-Mm  Motion 
Picture     Sound     Reproducers     (Laboratory 
Type) 
Proposed 


46:  299,  Apr.  1946 
46:  300,  Apr.  1946 
46:  301,  Apr.  1946 

46:  303,  Apr.  1946 
46:  305,  Apr.  1946 

46:  307,  Apr.  1946 
46:  309,  Apr.  1946 

50:  284,  Mar.  1948 

50:    275,    1948 
44:  285,  Apr.  1945 
51:  537,  Nov.  1948 

50:  286,  Mar.  1948 
50:  287,  Mar.  1948 

51:  539,  Nov.  1948 

50:  275,  Mar.  1948 
54:  107,  Jan.  1950 

50:  275,  Mar.  1948 
51:  541,  Nov.  1948 

50:  275,  Mar.  1948 


77 


AMERICAN  STANDARDS  —  by  numbers,  confd 
No.  Title 


Vol.,  page,  issue 


Z22.63 

Z22.64 
Z22. 65-1948 

Z22. 66-1948 

Z22. 67-1948 
Z22. 68-1949 
Z22. 69-1948 
Z22. 70-1948 


PH22.71- 
1950 

(Z22.71- 
1950) 

PH22.72- 
1950 

(Z22.72- 
1950) 

Z22.73 


Z22.74 
Z22.75 


Proposed,  Service-Type  Multifrequency  Test 
Film  for  35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Sound  Re- 
producers 

Laboratory-Type  Multifrequency  Test  Film  for 
35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Sound  Reproducers 

Scanning-Beam  Uniformity  Test  Film  for  35- 
Mm  Motion  Picture  Sound  Reproducers 
(Service  Type) 

Proposed 

Scanning-Beam  Uniformity  Test  Film  for 
35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Sound  Reproducers 
(Laboratory  Type) 

Proposed 

1000-Cycle    Balancing   Test   Film   for   35-Mm 

Motion  Picture  Sound  Reproducers 
Proposed 

Buzz-Track  Test  Film  for  35-Mm  Motion  Pic- 
ture Sound  Reproducers 
Proposed 

Sounds  Records  and  Scanning  Area  of  Double 
Width  Push-Pull  Sound  Prints  Normal  Cen- 
terline  Type 

Sound  Records  and  Scanning  Area  of  Double 
Width  Push-Pull  Sound  Prints  Offset  Center- 
line  Type 

Cutting  and  Perforating  Dimensions  for  32-Mm 
Sound  Motion  Picture  Negative  and  Positive 
Raw  Stock 


Proposed 

Cutting  and  Perforating  Dimensions  for  32-Mm 
Silent  Motion  Picture  Negative  and  Positive 
Raw  Stock 

Proposed 

Proposed,  Cutting  and  Perforating  Dimensions 
for  32-Mm  on  35-Mm  Motion  Picture  Nega- 
tive Raw  Stock 

Proposed,  Base  Point  for  Focusing  Scales  on 
16-Mm  and  8-Mm  Motion  Picture  Cameras 

Proposed,  A  and  B  Windings  of  16-Mm  Raw- 
Stock  Film  With  Perforations  Along  One 
Edge  (Second  Draft) 

Proposed,  For  Winding  of  16-Mm  Sound  Film 
(First  Draft) 


50:  275,  Mar.  1948 

50:  275,  Mar.  1948 

51:  542,  Nov.  1948 

• 

50:  275,  Mar.  1948 
51:  543,  Nov.  1948 

50:  275,  Mar.  1948 
51:  545,  Nov.  1948 

50:  275,  Mar.  1948 
54:  108,  Jan.  1950 

50:  276,  Mar.  1948 
51:  547,  Nov.  1948 

51:  548,  Nov.  1948 
56:  237,  Feb.  1951 

52:  225,  Feb.  1949 
56:  239,  Feb.  1951 

52:  227,  Feb.  1949 
52:  229,  Feb.  1949 

53:  297,  Sept.  1949 
56:  113,  Jan.  1951 

53:  298,  Sept.  1949 


78 


AMERICAN  STANDARDS  —  by  numbers,  cont'd 

No.  Title  Vol.,  page,  issue 

Z22.76  Proposed,  Mounting  Threads  and  Flange  Focal      53:  299,  Sept.  1949 

Distances  for  Lenses  on  16-  and  8-Mm  Mo- 
tion Picture  Cameras 

PH22.77  Proposed,    Splices    for    8-Mm    Motion    Picture      56:  361,  Mar.  1951 

(Z22.77)  Films 

Z22. 78-1950      Mounting     Frames     for     Theater     Projection      54:  505,  Apr.  1950 
Screens 

Z22. 79-1950      16-Mm  Sound  Projector  Test  Film  54:  507,  Apr.  1950 

Z22. 80-1950      Scanning-Beam     Uniformity     Test     Film     for      55:  118,  July  1950 
16-Mm   Motion  Picture   Sound   Reproducers 
( Laboratory  Type ) 

Z22. 81-1950      Scanning-Beam     Uniformity     Test     Film     for      55:  119,  July  1950 
16-Mm   Motion  Picture   Sound   Reproducers 

(Service  Type) 

Z22.82  Proposed,     Sound     Transmission     of     Theater      55:  120,  July  1950 

Projection  Screens 

Z22.83  Proposed,    Edge    Numbering    16-Mm    Motion      56:  115,  Jan.  1951 

Picture  Film 

PH22.84  Proposed,    Dimensions    for    Projection    Lamps      56:  244,  Feb.  1951 

Medium  Prefocus  Ring  Double-Contact 
Base-Up  Type  for  16-Mm  and  8-Mm  Motion 
Picture  Projectors 

PH22.85  Proposed,    Dimensions    for    Projection    Lamps      56:  246,  Feb.  1951 

Medium  Prefocus  Base-Down  Type  for 
16-Mm  and  8-Mm  Motion  Picture  Projectors 

Z38.3.1  Definition  of  Safety  Film  50:  288,  Mar.  1948 


79